null  null
SAM4s SPS-1000
Program Manual
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
2005, CRS, Inc.
PM-SPS1000 Version 2.2
CRS, Inc.
Limited Warranty and Disclaimers of Warranty
This manual has been developed by CRS, Inc. It is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel and should be read in its
entirety before attempting to install, use or program the product(s).
Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a warranty of, or representation with respect
to, the product or any of the products to which this manual applies. This manual is subject to change without notice and CRS, Inc. has no
obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual. Further, CRS, Inc. also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make
changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate. No representation is made that this manual is complete or accurate in
all respects and CRS, Inc. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions contained in this manual. In no event shall CRS, Inc. be liable for
any incidental or consequential damages relating to or arising out of the use of this manual. This document contains proprietary
information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied or reproduced without
prior written consent of CRS, Inc.
NOTICE
IF ANY WARRANTY IS EXTENDED TO YOU WITH REGARD TO THE PRODUCT(S) TO WHICH THIS MANUAL APPLIES, IT
IS A WARRANTY FROM THE ENTITY OR INDIVIDUAL FROM WHOM YOU DIRECTLY PURCHASED THE PRODUCT(S).
SUBJECT TO THE FOREGOING, UNLESS YOU ARE A DIRECT END USER CUSTOMER OF CRS, INC., CRS, INC. DOES NOT
EXTEND TO YOU ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR USE, OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY
WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IN CONNECTION WITH THE PRODUCT(S)
OR ANY SOFTWARE, DRIVERS, OR PROGRAMMING PRODUCT, WHETHER EMBEDDED IN PRODUCT(S) OR PROVIDED AS
A SEPARATE PROGRAM, OR USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS/THESE PRODUCT(S). CRS, INC. SPECIFICALLY DOES
NOT WARRANT THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY DRIVERS, SOFTWARE, OR PROGRAMMING PRODUCTS LICENSED
HEREUNDER, WHETHER EMBEDDED IN PRODUCTS OR PROVIDED AS SEPARATE PROGRAMS, SHALL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN SUCH DRIVERS, SOFTWARE OR
PROGRAMMING PRODUCTS SHALL OPERATE IN COMBINATION(S) WHICH MAY BE SELECTED FOR USE BY YOU OR
OTHERWISE MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS.
CRS, Inc. is not responsible for any damages or loss, either direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential, which you may experience
as a result of your purchase or use of the product(s). Your sole remedy in the event that you encounter any difficulties with the product(s)
is against the entity or individual from whom you purchased the product(s).
Revision 2.0 - April 1, 2005
WARNING - U.S.
THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES, USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY, AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL, MAY CAUSE INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS. IT HAS BEEN
TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A COMPUTING DEVICE PURSUANT TO SUBPART J OF
PART 15 OF FCC RULES WHICH ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST SUCH INTERFERENCE
WHEN OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT. OPERATIONS OF THE EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY
TO CAUSE INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER, AT HIS OWN EXPENSE, WILL BE REQUIRED TO TAKE WHATEVER
MEASURES MAY BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE.
NOTICE - CANADA
THIS APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH THE CLASS “A” LIMITS FOR RADIO INTERFERENCE AS SPECIFIED IN THE CANADIAN
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATIONS.
CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES CLASS “A” D’INTERFERENCE RADIO TEL QUE SPECIFIER PAR MINISTRE
CANADIEN DES COMMUNICATIONS DANS LES REGLEMENTS D’INTERFERENCE RADIO.
ATTENTION
The product that you have purchased may contain a battery that may be recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various state and
local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of the battery into the municipal waste system.
Check with your local solid waste officials for details concerning recycling options or proper disposal.
Contents
Getting Started
1
Register Controls ....................................................................................................................... 1
Front View................................................................................................................... 1
Display Adjustments ................................................................................................... 2
Rear View.................................................................................................................... 2
Navigating the SPS 1000 ........................................................................................................... 3
Default Keyboard ........................................................................................................ 4
Key Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 5
Control Lock ............................................................................................................. 12
Key Prompting .......................................................................................................... 13
Page Up and Page Down ........................................................................................... 14
Choosing Items from Menus ..................................................................................... 15
Selecting and Filling Fields ....................................................................................... 16
Opening Pop-up Selection Windows ........................................................................ 17
Entering Alpha Characters ........................................................................................ 18
Initial Clear .............................................................................................................................. 21
S-Mode Programming
23
S- Mode Programming Menu .................................................................................................. 23
Self Tests ................................................................................................................................. 25
Serial & IRC Loopback Test ..................................................................................... 26
Drawer Test ............................................................................................................... 27
RTC Setting (Real Time Clock) ................................................................................ 27
Display Test............................................................................................................... 28
Keyboard Test ........................................................................................................... 28
Mode & Clerk Key Test ............................................................................................ 29
RAM Test.................................................................................................................. 30
IRC Test .................................................................................................................... 31
Printer Test ................................................................................................................ 32
RAM Checksum ........................................................................................................ 32
Version Check ........................................................................................................... 33
Card Read Test .......................................................................................................... 33
Memory Clear.......................................................................................................................... 34
Memory All Clear ..................................................................................................... 34
Selective Memory Clearing ....................................................................................... 36
Memory Allocation.................................................................................................................. 37
Keyboard Key Relocation........................................................................................................ 43
PLU Key Relocation ................................................................................................. 44
WLU Key Relocation................................................................................................ 46
Function Key Relocation........................................................................................... 48
System Options........................................................................................................................ 53
Printer Driver Selections.......................................................................................................... 55
Changing Printer Commands .................................................................................... 56
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Contents  i
Serial Port Device Selections...................................................................................................57
Define Serial Port Parameters..................................................................................................59
S-Mode Program Scan Printing ...............................................................................................61
System Password .....................................................................................................................62
Super Macro Scan....................................................................................................................63
ROM File Download ...............................................................................................................64
Bitmap File Download.............................................................................................................64
Load Default Messages............................................................................................................64
Check Unlock ..........................................................................................................................65
P-Mode Programming
67
P-Mode Programming Menu ...................................................................................................67
PLU Programming...................................................................................................................69
Add & Change...........................................................................................................70
Delete PLUs...............................................................................................................73
PLU Status Group (PLU Status Link) .....................................................................................75
Group .......................................................................................................................................83
Function Key ...........................................................................................................................85
Function Key Program Summary ..............................................................................86
Cancel........................................................................................................................89
Cash ...........................................................................................................................89
Check.........................................................................................................................90
Check Cash................................................................................................................91
Check Endorse...........................................................................................................91
Currency Conversion 1-5 ..........................................................................................92
Drive Thru/Eat In/Take Out ......................................................................................93
Error Correct..............................................................................................................93
Food Stamp Tend ......................................................................................................94
Guest #.......................................................................................................................94
KP Routing ................................................................................................................95
Macro 1-40 ................................................................................................................96
Mdse Return ..............................................................................................................97
Misc Tend 1-16 .........................................................................................................98
Modifier 1-10 ............................................................................................................99
Not Found PLU .......................................................................................................100
#/No Sale .................................................................................................................101
P/Bal ........................................................................................................................101
Paid Out 1-5/Recd Acct 1-5 ....................................................................................102
%1 - %10 .................................................................................................................103
Price Inquiry/Stock Inquiry .....................................................................................104
Print .........................................................................................................................105
Print Check ..............................................................................................................105
Promo ......................................................................................................................106
Recall Check 1-4 .....................................................................................................107
Scale ........................................................................................................................108
Store Check 1-4 .......................................................................................................109
Tax Exempt .............................................................................................................110
Time In/Out .............................................................................................................111
Tip 1-3 .....................................................................................................................111
Tip Declare ..............................................................................................................112
Tray Subtotal ...........................................................................................................112
Void Item.................................................................................................................113
Waste .......................................................................................................................113
X/Time.....................................................................................................................114
ii  Contents
SPS 1000 Program Manual
System Options...................................................................................................................... 115
General Function Options ....................................................................................... 116
Tax Options ............................................................................................................. 122
Cash Drawer Options .............................................................................................. 125
Training Mode Options ........................................................................................... 127
Level/Modifier Options........................................................................................... 129
Tracking File Options.............................................................................................. 131
Kitchen Printing/Video Options .............................................................................. 133
Validation/Subtotal Print Options ........................................................................... 136
General Printing Options......................................................................................... 138
Report Printing Options........................................................................................... 141
Report Options ........................................................................................................ 143
Time Keeping Options ............................................................................................ 146
E.J. (Electronic Journal) & Detail Printing Options................................................ 148
Taxes...................................................................................................................................... 150
Add On Taxes.......................................................................................................... 151
Tax Table................................................................................................................. 152
VAT......................................................................................................................... 154
Messages................................................................................................................................ 155
Logo Message ......................................................................................................... 156
Error Messages ........................................................................................................ 157
System Descriptors.................................................................................................. 160
Report Descriptors................................................................................................... 163
Check Endorsement Message.................................................................................. 164
Guest Check Logo Message .................................................................................... 165
Validation Message ................................................................................................. 166
DataTran Message................................................................................................... 167
Window Look Up (WLU) ..................................................................................................... 168
Overview ................................................................................................................. 168
WLU Programming................................................................................................. 169
Time Period ........................................................................................................................... 179
Employee ............................................................................................................................... 180
Edit Job Codes......................................................................................................... 182
Edit Pay Rates ......................................................................................................... 184
Authority Levels .................................................................................................................... 186
Authority Level Alpha Descriptors ......................................................................... 189
Printer Tables & KV Routing ................................................................................................ 190
System Printer Routing ........................................................................................... 192
Kitchen Video Routing............................................................................................ 194
Kitchen Printer Routing........................................................................................... 195
Receipt Printer Routing ........................................................................................... 198
Detail Printer Routing ............................................................................................. 199
Ingredient Inventory .............................................................................................................. 200
Edit Ingredient......................................................................................................... 201
Recipe Table............................................................................................................ 202
Time Activated Functions...................................................................................................... 204
Time Activated Keyboard Levels............................................................................ 205
Time Activated Price Levels ................................................................................... 207
Time Activated Macros ........................................................................................... 209
Time Activated String Reports................................................................................ 211
Time Activated Shifts.............................................................................................. 213
KP Time Period ....................................................................................................... 214
Product Mix Groups .............................................................................................................. 215
Product Mix Items ................................................................................................... 216
Product Mix Group Time Periods ........................................................................... 217
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Contents  iii
Custom Report Programming ................................................................................................218
Custom Report.........................................................................................................219
Edit Existing Reports...............................................................................................221
String Reports ........................................................................................................................223
PLU Stock..............................................................................................................................225
PLU Minimum Stock.............................................................................................................228
Copy Program........................................................................................................................229
Program File Download.........................................................................................................231
All Files ...................................................................................................................232
Select Program Files................................................................................................234
P-Mode Program Scan Printing .............................................................................................236
NON-PLU Code ....................................................................................................................237
PLU & WLU Key Assignment..............................................................................................239
PLU Key Assignment..............................................................................................240
WLU Key Assignment ............................................................................................242
Bitmap File Download...........................................................................................................244
Groups By Employee.............................................................................................................245
Employee Card Read Format.................................................................................................246
Age Verification ....................................................................................................................247
Appendices
249
Specifications.........................................................................................................................250
Accessing Cables and Connections .......................................................................................251
Removing the Rear Cover .......................................................................................251
Removing the Customer Display.............................................................................252
Connecting RS232C, IRC, and Cash Drawer Cables ..............................................253
Register Communications Ports.............................................................................................254
Standard Ports..........................................................................................................254
Optional Ports..........................................................................................................254
Pin Descriptions.....................................................................................................................254
Loop Back Connections.........................................................................................................255
System Configurations...........................................................................................................256
Inter Register Communications ...............................................................................256
Printer Configurations .............................................................................................258
Integrated Payment Program Requirements ..........................................................................260
Clear Current Batch (S-Mode) ................................................................................261
Replacing the Battery.............................................................................................................262
iv  Contents
Glossary of Terms
259
Index
269
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started
Register Controls
Front View
(Option)
Note: Break off the
plastic power switch
protective cover, or
leave it in place to
secure the switch from
tampering. (Use a
pointed device to set
switch.)
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started  1
Display Adjustments
Rear View
Protective Power Switch Cover
2  Getting Started
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Navigating the SPS 1000
This chapter explains the conventions used for displaying and entering information.
Review the information contained in this chapter before attempting to program your SPS
1000.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started  3
Default Keyboard
1
14
27
40
53
66
79
92
2
15
28
41
54
67
80
93
3
16
29
42
55
68
81
94
4
17
30
43
56
69
82
95
5
18
31
44
57
70
83
96
6
4  Getting Started
19
32
45
58
71
84
97
7
20
33
46
59
72
85
98
8
21
34
47
60
73
86
99
9
22
35
48
61
74
87
100
10
23
36
49
62
75
88
101
11
24
39
50
63
76
89
102
12
25
38
51
64
77
90
103
13
26
39
52
65
78
91
104
PRICE
LVL#1
KEYB
LVL#1
RECEIPT
ISSUE
TIME
CLOCK
EMP
#
PRICE
LVL#2
KEYB
LVL#2
P/O
#1
R/A
#1
REPEAT
PRICE
LVL#3
KEYB
LVL#3
ERR
CORR
VOID
ITEM
QUIT
MACRO
#1
ADD
CHECK
MDSE
RTRN
WLU#
EXEMPT
TAX
MACRO
#2
TAX 1
SHIFT
STORE
#1
RECALL
#1
EAT
IN
MACRO
#3
TAX 2
SHIFT
YES/NO
ENTER
TAKE
OUT
MACRO
#4
PAGE
UP

PAGE
DOWN
DRIVE
THRU
%1



MISC
TND3
%2
X/TIME
PLU
CL
Esc
MISC
TND2
%3
7
8
9
MISC
TND1
%4
4
5
6
CHECK
%5
1
2
3
SBTL
DONE
0
00
.
CASH
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Key Descriptions
Essential Function Keys
Because the SAM4s SPS 1000 keyboard is programmable, you can use the default keyboard,
you can modify it, or you can design a keyboard that fits your exact needs.
In order to program and operate the SAM4s SPS 1000, you must place all of the
following keys on every keyboard:

Numeric Keys 0-9

CL/ESC

Y/N

ENTER

Cursor Control Keys    

PAGE UP/PAGE DN

DONE

X/TIME
You cannot change the assignment of an essential key (i.e. numeric key, Y/N, cursor
keys, ENTER, etc.) unless it is first located in a different position on the keyboard.
Many function keys have programming options. See "Function Key" programming in "PMode Programming" for individual function key programming options.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started  5
Function Key List
Key
Description
0 - 9, 00, 000
(Numeric Keys)
Used in all modes to enter numeric information such as prices or quantities.
ADD CHECK
Use to add multiple guest checks (tracking balances or soft checks) for
payment together. See "TRAY SUBTL" on page 11 to add separate
transactions when you are not tracking balances.
ALPHA TEXT
Use to type a name or message that will be associated with a soft check.
Press the ALPHA TEXT key anytime after a check has been opened, then
type a message (up to 15 characters) using the alpha keyboard overlay and
press ENTER. The message is saved and printed/displayed with the order.
CANCEL
Press CANCEL to abort a transaction in progress. All current items are
removed (voided).
CASH
Use CASH to finalize or tender cash sales. Change is computed when the
amount of cash tendered is greater than the amount of the sale.
CHECK
Use CHECK to finalize or tender check sales. Change is computed when
the amount of the check tendered is greater than the amount of the sale.
CHECK CASH
Use the CHECK CASH key to exchange a check for cash outside of a sale.
CHECK ENDORSE
If compulsory check endorsement is set with the CHECK key, use the
CHECK ENDORSE key to print the endorsement message after a check is
inserted into the appropriate printer.
CLEAR/ESC
Use the CLEAR function to clear numeric entries or error conditions. Use
the ESC (escape) function to exit program screens and return to the previous
menu or screen.
CONTINUE
Use to override the pop-up employee function after a transaction. Allows
the employee to post an additional transaction without signing on again.
CURR. CONV. 1-5
Use to convert and display the value of the transaction in foreign currency.
Only cash tender is allowed after pressing a CURR CONV key. Change is
calculated and issued in home currency.
CURSOR CONTROL KEYS
()
1. On menu screens, press the up or down keys to move the cursor to the
menu item you wish to select.
2. On program screens, press the cursor control keys (up, down, left, right)
to move the cursor (highlighted field) to the field you wish to edit.
3. On program screens, use the cursor keys to finalize your entry in the
current field and move the cursor to the next field.
4. On operation screens, press the up or down cursor keys to select a main
item that has been registered in the current transaction. The last item
entered is automatically selected.
DECIMAL (.)
Use the decimal key to enter fractional rates or percentages. Do not use to
enter amounts; the decimal is automatically inserted in the proper position.
DONE
Press the DONE key to exit a WLU, or to execute a report after all report
options have been selected.
6  Getting Started
SPS 1000 Program Manual
DRIVE THRU
DRIVE THRU is a subtotal key. Press DRIVE THRU to record the
amount of the transaction in the drive thru total on the financial report. Tax
calculation can be changed to accommodate different tax rules for drive thru
sales.
EAT-IN
EAT-IN is a subtotal key. Press EAT-IN to record the amount of the
transaction in the eat-in total on the financial report. Tax calculation can be
changed to accommodate different tax rules for eat-in sales. Sales cannot be
split between eat-in and take-out.
EMPLOYEE
The EMPLOYEE # key is used to sign on a cashier, clerk, server or
employee who is clocking in or out.
EMPLOYEE (1-10)
The EMPLOYEE (1-10) keys can be programmed to sign on a specific
employee when pressed directly, without entering a code.
ENTER
When programming or selecting from window look-ups, press ENTER to
enter data into a field with the cursor remaining in the field.
ERR.CORR
Press ERR CORR immediately after an item to void that item.
FD STMP SHIFT
Press FD STMP SHIFT to shift the pre-programmed food stamp status of
an item prior to its registration.
FD STMP SUBTTL
Press FD STMP SUBTTL to display the total of food stamp eligible items
registered in the current transaction.
FD STMP TEND
Press the FD STMP TEND key to tender Food Stamps after the display of
the food stamp eligible subtotal. Depending upon function key
programming, change less than $1 may be applied to any cash balance or
issued as cash change.
GUEST #
Use to record the number of guests served by a transaction. The entry may
be compulsory. The entry appears on receipts and the kitchen printer/KVS.
HOLD
Use to identify an individual item, or an entire transaction so that the
designated items will not print/display at the kitchen printer/KVS at the
current finalization. Items designated as "hold" items will display on the
screen with an "H".
INACTIVE
The INACTIVE function key can be re-used as many times as necessary to
inactivate key locations.
KP ROUTING
The KP ROUTING key is used to override KP Time Period control. For
example, a restaurant might normally operate two kitchens at one time and
one kitchen at other times. In case the volume of business changes, the
manager might want to control the KP routing manually. Also, a single
item, or large order might be required to be sent to a different printer than
normal. Select STAYDOWN, TICKET POP UP or ITEM POP up
operation. To operate, press the key at any time inside or outside of a
transaction.
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1-5
Use to select one of the five keyboard levels.
LIST CHECK 1-4
Press LIST CHECK (for the appropriate tracking file) to display a list of all
open soft checks in the file.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started  7
MACRO OFF, P, R, X, Z,
VOID
Press the MACRO OFF, P, R, X, Z, or VOID key while programming a
macro sequence to allow the macro to set the register in the indicated control
lock position (without actually turning the control lock.)
MACRO PAUSE
Press the MACRO PAUSE key during macro programming to indicate a
pause in the macro. A macro will stop when it reaches the pause, and then
accept an operator key entry before continuing the macro sequence.
MACRO SET
Press the MACRO SET key to create a macro at any time without going
through the P-mode macro program.
MACRO 1 - 40
Use to execute one of forty possible preprogrammed key sequences.
MACRO #
Use to execute one of the forty possible macros by entering the macro
number and pressing the MACRO # key.
MDSE RETURN
Press the MDSE RETURN key to adjust items inside or outside of a
transaction.
MISC TEND 1-16
Press a MISC TEND key to finalize or tender sales paid by various charges
or other media. Tendering may or may not be allowed depending upon
function key programming.
MISC TEND #
Access any of the 16 possible miscellaneous tender functions by entering the
tender number (1-16) and pressing the MISC TEND # key.
MODIFIER 1-10
Preceding a PLU entry, a modifier key changes a digit of the PLU number,
causing a different PLU to be registered. Modifier keys can be set to change
any of the 14 PLU digit positions to any specified digit (0-9).
NEXT RECORD
Use the NEXT RECORD key when programming areas with multiple
records, i.e. PLUs, PLU Status Groups, Groups, Function Keys, WLUs, or
Employees. Press the NEXT RECORD key from any field on the program
screen and the next sequential record will display with the cursor in the
same field position.
#/NO SALE
Use to enter a non-adding memo number during a transaction (# function) or
use to open the cash drawer outside of a sale (no sale function).
NEXT DOLLAR
Press the NEXT DOLLAR key to tender an amount the next whole dollar
above the sale total. For example, if the sale total is $2.52, then the NEXT
DOLLAR key would automatically tender $3.00.
NOT FOUND PLU
Designed to be used in a scanning system, the NOT FOUND PLU key
allows the operator to immediately enter basic PLU information for an item
that is not in the PLU file. If the "Not Found PLU" message displays when
a PLU is entered (or when an item is scanned) the operator can press the
NOT FOUND PLU key and will be prompted to enter PLU price,
descriptor and linking information. The item is registered immediately.
P/BAL
Enter an amount, and then press the Manual Previous Balance (P/BAL) key
to use the simplest form of Charge Posting/Table Service. The P/BAL key
may be used any time within a transaction. Transactions where the P/BAL
key is used must be finalized with one of the STORE CHECK keys.
8  Getting Started
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
When a transaction, menu or program contains more information than can
be displayed on the screen at one time, press the PAGE UP or PAGE DN
keys to shift your view of the information up or down. Note that the scroll
indicators (,, ) tell you whether there is more information above,
below, or above and below your current view.
PAID OUT 1-5
Press a PAID OUT key to remove cash, check or miscellaneous media from
the drawer.
PAID RECALL
The PAID RECALL key is used to recall last x number of transactions,
starting with the last transaction finalized. (X is determined in memory
allocation.) Once recalled, a transaction could be reviewed (using the cursor
keys or PAGE UP/PAGE DN) and/or corrected as necessary. To exit the
paid order view, press DONE.
PARK ORDER
Used in conjunction with a kitchen video system and the SERVE ORDER
function key. Enter a number and press PARK ORDER to park or
"suspend" an order on the video monitor until the order is completely filled.
In the case of a drive through order that cannot be completed when the
customer arrives at the pick-up window, the operator would park the order
until it was completely filled. The order would then be served or bumped by
using the SERVE ORDER key.
%1 - %10
Ten discount keys (%1 - %10) are available to handle various kinds of
discounts, markdowns and adjustments to items or transactions.
PLU
Enter the PLU code number and press PLU to register a PLU.
PREV. RECORD
Use the PREV. RECORD key when programming areas with multiple
records, i.e. PLUs, PLU Status Groups, Groups, Function Keys, WLUs, or
Employees. Press the PREV. RECORD field from any field on the
program screen and the previous sequential record will display with the
cursor in the same field position.
PRICE INQ
Press the PRICE INQ to display the PLU price without actually registering
the PLU.
PRICE LVL 1-20
Press a LEVEL key prior to a PLU entry to shift the price of a PLU to a
different price set in PLU programming.
PRINT
Press the PRINT function to send items that require special preparation to
the kitchen printer (or KVS) before the sale is finalized. An item can be
programmed as an auto grill item, requiring the PRINT key to be pressed
every time the menu item is sold. This function does not affect normal
kitchen printer/KVS routing.
PRINT ALL
First press the one of the LIST CHECK keys to display all the open soft
checks in the tracking file. While the open checks are displeyed, press the
PRINT ALL key to print a copy all all open checks.
PRINT CHECK
Prints the soft guest check (tracking file) that is currently displayed. The
PRINT CHECK key may be programmed to store (service) the check
automatically.
PRINT HOLD
Use to remove the "hold" designation from an item or order, so that the
items and their instructions are now sent to the kitchen printer/KVS at
finalization.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started  9
PROMO
Press the PROMO key to void the price (the item remains) of an item. Can
be used for 2 for 1 promotions. A PROMO count is available for each menu
item.
PRINT SCREEN
Press PRINT SCREEN to print a copy of the current screen on the
designated receipt printer.
QUIT
Press QUIT to automatically sign off the current cashier/clerk.
RECEIPT ON/OFF
Press RECEIPT ON/OFF to toggle the receipt function from on to off.
You must first have a receipt printer connected, identified to the register,
and the print receipt automatically option (see General Printing Options)
turned on.
RECALL CHECK # 1-4
The check tracking system can maintain only balances (hard check) or entire
transactions (soft check) in the register memory. Four different tracking
files can be separated to maintain, for example: restaurant checks, call-in
orders, delivery orders, and/or table balances. Press one of the four
RECALL CHECK # keys directly to begin a tracking transaction, or enter
the tracking number and press the RECALL CHECK # key to access the
existing tracking balance.
RECD ACCT 1-5
Press a RECD ACCT key to add cash, check or miscellaneous media to the
drawer.
RECEIPT
Press the RECEIPT key to issue a transaction receipt at the designated
receipt printer.
REPEAT
Press the REPEAT key to quickly re-order a set of items. When a check is
recalled, simply press the REPEAT key to automatically register all of the
items registered at the previous posting.
SCALE
Press the SCALE key to automatically display the weight from a scale
connected to the register, or to manually enter a weight for extension.
SEAT #
Use to identify a specific seat (or person) within a transaction. Facilitates
separate payment by seat, and identifies to the food preparation staff
(through the kitchen printer/KVS) how to assemble meals. Seat numbers
may be assigned at the time of entry or, if necessary, later in the transaction.
SERVE ORDER
Used in conjunction with a kitchen video system and the PARK ORDER
function key. Enter a number and press SERVE ORDER to serve or bump
the order from a video monitor. No video keypad is needed for this
function.
SPLIT CHECK
Function key not in use with current feature set.
SPLIT PAY
Press the SPLIT PAY key to divide the amount of a guest check into equal
segments for payment by more than one person.
STOCK INQ
Press the STOCK INQ key, and then enter (or scan) an item to view the
stock status of the item. (The item must be a stock item to use this
function.)
10  Getting Started
SPS 1000 Program Manual
STORE CHECK 1-4
The check tracking system can maintain only balances (hard check) or entire
transactions (soft check) in the register memory. Four different tracking
files can be separated to maintain, for example, restaurant checks, call-in
orders, delivery orders, and/or table balances. Press one of the four STORE
CHECK # keys to finalize a tracking transaction. (This function is
equivalent to the SERVICE function.)
SUBTOTAL
Press SUBTOTAL to display the message “SUBOTAL” on the display.
Although a running total is always displayed on the bottom of the screen,
the SUBTOTAL key may be required before some functions, such as
subtotal discount.
TABLE # (1-4)
Use to enter the table number of the check. If a table number is entered, the
TABLE # key can also be used to recall the check.
TAKE-OUT
TAKE-OUT is a subtotal key. Press TAKE-OUT to record the amount of
the transaction in the take-out total on the financial report. Tax calculation
can be changed to accommodate different tax rules for take-out sales. Sales
cannot be split between eat-in and take-out.
TAX EXEMPT
The TAX EXEMPT can be preprogrammed to exempt specific taxes from a
sale.
TAX SHIFT 1-6
Use to shift the preprogrammed tax status of an item. Press before an item
entry to make taxable.
TIME IN/OUT
Press the TIME IN/OUT key to record start and stop work times for the
registered employee. Hours worked are maintained by the time clock
system.
TIP (1-3)
Use to enter a tip amount on a check.
TIP DECLARE
Use to declare employee tips if you are not using the employee time keeping
feature. (If you are using employee time keeping, you are prompted to
declare tips when clocking out.)
TRANSFER CHECK (1-4)
Use to transfer one or all open soft checks form one server to another server.
A transfer check receipt will print.
TRAY SUBTL
Press the TRAY SUBTL key to finalize a transaction that will be paid later
with subsequent transactions. See "ADD CHECK" on page 6 to add
multiple soft checks for payment.
VALID
Press VALID to initiate a single line validation. (A printer with validation
capability must be connected to the system and programmed appropriately.)
VOID ITEM
Press the VOID ITEM key to remove an item from a transaction. Locate
the cursor on the item you wish to remove and press the VOID ITEM key.
WASTE
Used to start and end entries of items that are wasted. A waste count is
maintained for each item and inventory is adjusted.
WLU
Use to access a WLU by entering the numeric WLU number and pressing
the WLU key.
X/TIME
Use the X/TIME key to multiply, to register split price items, or display the
time in the REG mode.
Y/N
When programming, press Y/N to toggle a selection from yes to no or no to
yes.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started  11
Control Lock
OFF
VOID
REG
VOID
Use to void (correct) items outside of a sale.
OFF
The register is inoperable.
REG
(Register) use for normal registrations.
X
Use to read register reports and perform other manager
functions.
Z
Use to read register reports and reset totals to zero.
PGM
(Program) Use to program the register.
S MODE
Use for tests and special settings. This position is not
marked on the control lock.
X
Z
PGM
S MODE
The SPS 1000 includes two sets of keys that can be used to access the following control lock
positions.
Key
Positions Accessible
VOID
VOID, OFF, REG, X
X
OFF, REG, X
Z
OFF, REG, X, Z
PGM
VOID, OFF, REG, X, Z, PGM
C
ALL POSITIONS
12  Getting Started
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Key Prompting
While you are programming the SPS-1000, the bottom line of the screen displays the keys
that you are allowed to use next. (These prompts do not display on the operator screen in the
REG control lock position, or in manager operations.)
For example, turn the key to the P position to view the P-MODE PROGRAMMING MENU:
P-MODE PROGRAMMING MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Function keys that you
are allowed to use are
displayed at the bottom
of the screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual

PLU
PLU STATUS GROUP
GROUP
FUNCTION KEY
SYSTEM OPTION
TAXES
MESSAGES
WINDOW LOOK UP (WLU)
TIME PERIOD
EMPLOYEE
AUTHORITY LEVEL
PRINTER TABLES & KV ROUTING
ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Getting Started  13
Page Up and Page Down
The scroll indicators tell
you if the area in which
you are working (in this
case, General Printing
Options Programming
area) contains more
information than can be
displayed at one time.
Arrow down indicates more
information below. Press
PAGE DN to view the
information below what is
currently displayed.
Arrow up and down
indicates more information
above and below. Press
PAGE DN to view the
information below what is
currently displayed. Press
PAGE UP to view the
information above what is
currently displayed.
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

PRINT ON RECEIPT:
EMPLOYEE NAME
Y
CONSECUTIVE #
Y
ITEMS BY GROUP
N
DATE
Y
TIME
Y
PREAMBLE/POSTAMBLE
Y
ORDER #
Y
SEAT #
Y
RECEIPT FEED LINES AFTER PRINT
00
LINES AFTER PREAMBLE
00
LINES BEFORE POSTAMBLE
00
BUFFERED RECEIPT: Y=STUB/N=FULL
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.

PRINT RECEIPT WHEN SIGNING ON/OFF Y
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN CLOCKING IN/OUT Y
CONDENSE TRAY SBTL RECEIPTS
N
JOURNAL: Y=REAL TIME/N=BATCH
N
PRINT PLU CODE WITH DESCRIPTOR
Y
TRANSACTION # IS RANDOM NUMBER
N
HOME CURRENCY SYMBOL ($ DEFAULT) $
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #1
@
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #2
@
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #3
@
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #4
@
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #5
@
PRINT TENDER ON RECEIPT
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS
19. DISABLE LINE FIND ON SLIP PRINTER N
20. GUEST CHECK PREAMBLE/POSTAMBLE
NONE 
21. PRINT RECEIPT AUTOMATICALLY
N
22. PRINT RCPT AFTER TIME CLOCK EDIT
N
23. PRINT GROUP NAME
N
WHEN PRINTING ITEMS BY GROUP
24. PRINT GUEST CHK PRINT COUNT ON GC N
Arrow up indicates more
information above. Press
PAGE UP to view the
information above what is
currently displayed.
14  Getting Started

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Choosing Items from Menus
Choose an item from the
menu in one of two ways:
1. Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
2. Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and press
ENTER.
P-MODE PROGRAMMING MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

PLU
PLU STATUS GROUP
GROUP
FUNCTION KEY
SYSTEM OPTION
TAXES
MESSAGES
WINDOW LOOK UP (WLU)
TIME PERIOD
EMPLOYEE
AUTHORITY LEVEL
PRINTER TABLES & KV ROUTING
ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
The cursor
automatically selects
the first item when the
menu screen is first
opened.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started  15
Selecting and Filling Fields
1. Press the  or  key
to select the field
above or below the
current cursor
position.
2. For yes/no fields,
press the Y/N key to
toggle from yes to no.
3. For fields that accept
numeric values, type
the appropriate value
using numeric keys.
Values that are not
allowed will not be
accepted
4. Press ENTER to
accept the new entry
or press  to accept
the entry and advance
to the next field.
Press the  or  key to
select the field to the right or
left of the current cursor
position.
16  Getting Started
PLU#00000000000001 PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTOR:
PLU#1
GROUP LINK #1
00
PLU STATUS LINK #
001
PIECE COUNT
000 RECIPE#
00
ACTIVATE WLU#
00
INACTIVE
N
PRESET?
N
ALLOW PRESET/HALO OVERRIDE?
N
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#1? 01
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#2? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#3? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#4? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#5? 00
PLU# ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
PLU#00000000000001 PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTOR:
PLU#1
GROUP LINK #1
00
PLU STATUS LINK #
001
PIECE COUNT
000 RECIPE#
00
ACTIVATE WLU#
00
INACTIVE
N
PRESET?
N
ALLOW PRESET/HALO OVERRIDE?
N
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#1? 01
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#2? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#3? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#4? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#5? 00
PLU# ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Opening Pop-up Selection Windows
1. The arrow indicates
the selections for this
field are made from a
pop-up window.
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2. With the field
selected and the
cursor on the arrow,
press ENTER. A
pop-up window
displays with the
selections for the field
listed.
3. Press the  or  keys
to make your choice,
then press ENTER to
close the pop-up
window. Your new
choice is displayed.
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS
1.
6.
MANAGER CONTROL (IN X-MODE):
NEGATIVE SALES
N
NEGATIVE TENDER
N
ENFORCE EAT-IN/TAKE-OUT/DRIVE THRU:
AT BEGIN OF SALE
N
BEFORE TENDER
N
DEFAULT DESTINATION
E4
ROUNDING ON % & TAX:
NONE 5 
ROUNDING ON SPLIT
EAT-IN LT
TAKE-OUT 5 
DRIVE-THRU
CONSOLIDATE LIKE ITEMS
Y

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
2.
3.
4.
5.
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS
1.
6.
MANAGER CONTROL (IN X-MODE):
NEGATIVE SALES
N
NEGATIVE TENDER
N
ENFORCE EAT-IN/TAKE-OUT/DRIVE THRU:
AT BEGIN OF SALE
N
BEFORE TENDER
N
DEFAULT DESTINATION
E4
ROUNDING ON % & TAX:
NONE 5 
ROUNDING ON SPLIT
EAT-IN LT
TAKE-OUT 5 
DRIVE-THRU
CONSOLIDATE LIKE ITEMS
Y

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
2.
3.
4.
5.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
MANAGER CONTROL (IN X-MODE):
NEGATIVE SALES
N
NEGATIVE TENDER
N
ENFORCE EAT-IN/TAKE-OUT/DRIVE THRU:
AT BEGIN OF SALE
N
BEFORE TENDER
N
DEFAULT DESTINATION
NONE 4
ROUNDING ON % & TAX:
UP AT .5 
ROUNDING ON SPLIT PRICE/DECIMAL MULT
UP AT .5 
Getting Started  17
Entering Alpha Characters
You have the option of using the Alpha Keyboard Overlay to enter descriptors (the default
method) or you can enter descriptors by entering a three-digit code for each character. See
“General Function Options” in P-Mode Programming to select the method you wish to enter
descriptors.
The key layout of the Alpha Keyboard Overlay is shown below:
Alpha Overlay
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
-
_
|
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
+
=
\
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
;
"
'
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
<
>
,
.
?
/
CAPS
LOCK
SHIFT
BOLD
LOCK
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE

{
}
[
]
¼
½
¾


BACK
Y/N
ENTER
Fs
PAGE
UP
PAGE
DN
T
(CURSOR))







(DESC)
(DESC)
(DESC)
(DESC)
Ç

Å
Æ
Ö
Ü
Ñ
ë
ï
ÿ
É
¿
á
é
í
ó
ú
@/
FOR
à
è
ì
ò
ù
7
8
9
â
ê
î
ô
û
4
5
6

ß

ø
1
2
3
SBTL
¢
£
¥

0
00
.
CASH
#1
Ä
18  Getting Started
ƒ
(CURSOR)) (CURSOR)) (CURSOR))
PLU ESC
X
PREV
REC
NEXT
REC
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Entering Descriptors with the Alpha Overlay
1. The indicator
“ALPHA” displays
when a field that
accepts alphanumeric
entries is selected. At
this time, the
keyboard is shifted to
the alpha keyboard
overlay.
2. Type a new descriptor
using the typewriter
style keyboard on the
alpha overlay. If you
make a mistake:

Press ESC and
the original
descriptor will be
displayed again,
or

Press BACK to
remove the
previous
character.
PLU#00000000000001 PROGRAMMING
ALPHA
DESCRIPTOR:
PLU1
GROUP LINK #1
00
PLU STATUS LINK #
001
PIECE COUNT
000 RECIPE#
00
ACTIVATE WLU#
00
INACTIVE
N
PRESET?
N
ALLOW PRESET/HALO OVERRIDE?
N
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#1? 01
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#2? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#3? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#4? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#5? 00
PLU# ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press ENTER to
finalize the new
descriptor, or press 
to finalize the new
descriptor and move
the cursor to the next
field.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started  19
Alpha Code Chart for Alpha Entry by Code Number
CHAR
•
¾
©
“fs”
“tx”
®
CODE
007
008
009
011
020
021

024

025

026

027
CHAR
CODE
SPACE
032
!
033
"
034
#
035
$
036
%
037
&
038
'
039
(
040
)
041
CHAR
CODE
*
042
+
043
,
044
045
.
046
/
047
0
048
1
049
2
050
3
051
CHAR
CODE
4
052
5
053
6
054
7
055
8
056
9
057
:
058
;
059
<
060
=
061
CHAR
CODE
>
062
?
063
@
064
A
065
B
066
C
067
D
068
E
069
F
070
G
071
CHAR
CODE
H
072
I
073
J
074
K
075
L
076
M
077
N
078
O
079
P
080
Q
081
CHAR
CODE
R
082
S
083
T
084
U
085
V
086
W
087
X
088
Y
089
Z
090
[
091
CHAR
CODE
\
092
]
093
^
094
_
095
`
096
a
097
b
098
c
099
d
100
e
101
CHAR
CODE
f
102
g
103
h
104
I
105
j
106
k
107
l
108
m
109
n
110
o
111
CHAR
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
CODE
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
Ç
ü
é
â
127
128
129
130
131
CHAR
z
{
|
}
~
CODE
122
123
124
125
126
CHAR
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
CODE
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
CHAR
Ä
Å
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
CODE
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
CHAR
ÿ
Ö
Ü
¢
£
¥

ƒ
á
í
CODE
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
167
168
169
170
171
CHAR
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
CODE
162
163
164
165
166
¿
CHAR
CODE
¼
172

224
ß
225

230
ø
237
CHAR
Double
CODE
999
20  Getting Started
½
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Initial Clear
CAUTION: Do not share this information with unauthorized users. Distribute the
special S-Mode key only to those you may want to perform this function.
The initial clear function allows you to exit any register activity and return to a beginning or
cleared state. Any transaction that is in progress will be exited and totals for that transaction
will not be updated.
Here are some reasons you may want to perform an initial clear:

The register is in an unknown state, and you wish to exit the current program
or transaction without following normal procedures.

You have performed a function that includes a compulsory activity, such as
validating or printing, and you wish to bypass the compulsory activity.

An initial clear may be necessary as part of servicing, or troubleshooting an
SPS 1000 register or system.
Perform this procedure only as necessary. Contact your SAM4S dealer first if you have
questions about operating or programming your SPS-1000.
To Perform an Initial Clear:
1. Turn the power switch located on the right side of the register to the OFF
position.
2. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
3. Press and hold the key position where the CASH key is located on the default
keyboard layout.
4. While continuing to hold the CASH key, turn the power switch to the ON
position.
5. The message “SIGN ON REQUIRED” will display when the initial clear is
complete.
7
8
9
TND1
4
5
6
CHECK
1
2
3
SBTL
0
00
.
CASH
TO INITIALIZE:
Press and hold this key position
during power-up in PGM mode.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Getting Started  21
S-Mode Programming
S- Mode Programming Menu
CAUTION:
S-Mode functions are reserved for dealers who set-up and service your SPS-1000
system. The user will normally perform no S-Mode functions.
The procedures described in this area are security sensitive. Many S-Mode functions,
including memory clearing and memory allocation, may cause damage or loss if they
are performed without first backing up register data.
A special S-Mode key secures S-Mode. The S-Mode key position is located in an
unmarked position, one position clockwise from the PGM control lock position.
Distribute the special S-Mode key only to those you may want to perform these
functions.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  23
1. Turn the key to the S
position.
S-MODE PROGRAMMING MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor
and press ENTER.
ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
S-MODE PROGRAMMING MENU
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

24  S-Mode Programming
SELF TESTS
MEMORY CLEAR
MEMORY ALLOCATION
KEYBOARD KEY RELOCATION
SYSTEM OPTIONS
PRINTER DRIVER SELECTIONS
SERIAL PORT DEVICE SELECTIONS
DEFINE SERIAL PORT PARAMETERS
S-MODE PROGRAM SCAN PRINTING
SYSTEM PASSWORD
SUPER MACRO SCAN
ROM FILE DOWNLOAD
KEYBOARD KEY RELOCATION
SYSTEM OPTIONS
PRINTER DRIVER SELECTIONS
SERIAL PORT DEVICE SELECTIONS
DEFINE SERIAL PORT PARAMETERS
S-MODE PROGRAM SCAN PRINTING
SYSTEM PASSWORD
SUPER MACRO SCAN
ROM FILE DOWNLOAD
BITMAP FILE DOWNLOAD
LOAD DEFAULT MESSAGES
CHECK UNLOCK
ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Self Tests
1. Select SELF TEST
from the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
H/W TEST Screen.
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and
press ENTER.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
01 23-54-29
H/W TEST
1999.01.29 FRI
1. SERIAL & IRC LOOPBACK
2. DRAWER
3. RTC SETTING
4. DISPLAY
5. KEYBOARD
6. MODE & CLERK KEY
7. RAM
8. IRC
9. PRINTER
10. RAM CHECKSUM
11. VERSION CHECK
12. CARD READ TEST
ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
S-Mode Programming  25
Serial & IRC Loopback Test
01 23-54-29
1999.01.29 FRI
1. Select SERIAL &
IRC LOOPBACK
from the H/W TEST
MENU.
DATA RECEIVE TEST
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7 IRC
FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL
2. Power off the register
and install a loop
back connector at the
port(s) you wish to
test.
CONTROL SIGNAL TEST
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL
3. The display will
indicate PASS/FAIL
for each port. Refer
to "Loop Back
Connections" in the
"Appendix" for
information about
making a loop back
test connector.
PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN
4. Press any key to
return to the H/W
TEST MENU.
26  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Drawer Test
1. Select DRAWER
from the H/W TEST
MENU.
2. Power off the register
and install a drawer at
the ports you wish to
test.
3. The screen will
display "FIRST
DRAWER",
"SECOND
DRAWER" and
"THIRD DRAWER"
in sequence. Each
connected drawer
should open as it is
displayed.
01 23-54-29
1999.01.29 FRI
FIRST DRAWER
SECOND DRAWER
THIRD DRAWER
DRAWER COMPULSORY
DRAWER 1 CLOSED
DRAWER 2 CLOSED
DRAWER 3 CLOSED
4. Press any key to
return to the H/W
TEST MENU.
RTC Setting (Real Time Clock)
1. Select RTC
SETTING from the
H/W TEST MENU to
set the system clock
and calendar.
01 23-54-29
1999.01.29 FRI
ENTER DATE/TIME
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
2. Type the current
year/month/day/
hour/minute
/second, press
ENTER.
3. Press any key to
return to the H/W
TEST MENU.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  27
Display Test
1. Select DISPLAY
from the H/W TEST
MENU to begin the
display test.
01 23-54-29
2. At the completion of
the display exercise,
the message "Rear
LCD Test" will
display.
3. Press any key to
return to the H/W
TEST MENU.
1999.01.29 FRI
REAR LCD TEST
PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN
Keyboard Test
1. Select KEYBOARD
from the H/W TEST
MENU to display the
KEY TEST screen.
KEY TEST
2. Each key is depicted
at a square on the
keyboard. Press any
key; the key will be
indicated on the
display.
TURN
MODE KEY
TO FINISH
PRESS KEY
3. Turn the MODE key
to exit and return to
the H/W TEST
MENU.
28  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Mode & Clerk Key Test
1. Select
MODE/CLERK KEY
TEST from the H/W
TEST MENU to
begin the mode/clerk
key test.
2. Turn the mode key;
the display indicates
the current key
position.
01 23-54-29
1999.01.29 FRI
MODE/CLERK KEY TEST
TURN MODE KEY OR ENTER CLERK KEY
PRESS ANY KEY TO FINISH
REG MODE
3. Press any key to
return to the H/W
TEST MENU.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  29
RAM Test
1. Select RAM from the
H/W TEST MENU to
begin the RAM test.
01 23-54-29
RAM TESTING
007000 : TESTING 1234
1999.01.29 FRI
01 23-54-29
BASE RAM OK
EXT. RAM SIZE 200000(4)
1999.01.29 FRI
2. The display monitors
the progress of the
test.
3. At the completion of
the RAM test, the
message "BASE
RAM OK" will
display if there are no
RAM problems.
4. Press any key to
return to the H/W
TEST MENU.
PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN
NOTE: This test is non-destructive. Performing this test will not affect the current
program or totals.
30  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
IRC Test
1. Select IRC from the
H/W TEST MENU to
display the IRC
TEST menu.
01 23-54-29
IRC TEST
1999.01.29 FRI
1. REGISTER # SETTING
2. INTERNAL LOOPBACK(CHIP)
3. INTERNAL LOOPBACK(DRIVER)
4. EXTERNAL LOOPBACK
5. IRC SYSTEM TEST
2. Select "1. Register #
Setting" to enter the
IRC register number
(1-32).
Select 2 - 5 for a
specific test. Refer to
the table below for an
explanation of each
test.
3. Press any key to end
the test and return to
the IRC TEST menu.
#
TEST
Notes
2
INTERNAL LOOPBACK
(CHIP)
Tests the internal IRC integrated circuit. Test
runs continuously counting success (S) and failure
(F).
3
INTERNAL LOOKBACK
(DRIVER)"
Tests the internal IRC driver. Test runs
continuously counting success (S) and failure (F).
4
EXTERNAL LOOPBACK
This test requires a loopback connector. Test runs
continuously counting success (S) and failure (F).
5
IRC SYSTEM TEST
Test sends packet to each register in the range
input. Test runs continuously counting success
(S) and failure (F).
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  31
Printer Test
1. Select PRINTER
from the H/W TEST
MENU to begin the
printer test.
2. Type the Port
Number where the
printer is attached (17), press ENTER.
The printer will print
a test pattern
continuously until the
printer is turned off.
01 23-54-29
1999.01.29 FRI
PRINTER TEST
ENTER PORT NUMBER (1 - 7)
3. Press ESC to return
to the H/W TEST
MENU.
RAM Checksum
1. Select DISPLAY
from the H/W TEST
MENU to begin the
display test.
2. The messages:
"Calculating Base
RAM checksum" and
Calculating Ext.
RAM checksum" will
display momentarily
before the RAM
checksums display.
01 23-54-29
BASE RAM : 00018ee9
EXT. RAM : 00000000
1999.01.29 FRI
PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN
3. Press any key to
return to the H/W
TEST MENU.
32  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Version Check
1. Select VERSION
CHECK from the
H/W TEST MENU to
display software
version and RAM
information.
2. The messages:
"CALCULATING
ROM CHECKSUM"
will display
momentarily before
the version
information and
checksums display.
01 23-54-29
1999.01.29 FRI
SAM4S
VER2.11
SPS-1000
AUG.26 1999
RAM SIZE : 512KByte
BASE(512K) EXT.(0000K)
ROM CHECKSUM : 04BAA684
PLU CHECKSUM : 0000B6B0
# PLU : 100/100
BOOT ROM VERSION : (V1.03)
INIT#: 0 PFAIL# : 1
PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN
3. Press any key to
return to the H/W
TEST MENU.
Card Read Test
1. Select CARD READ
TEST from the H/W
TEST MENU to test
an optional credit
card reader.
01 23-54-29
1999.01.29 FRI
CARD READ TEST
SWIPE THE CARD
2. At the messages:
"SWIPE THE
CARD", swipe the
card through the
reader.
3. Press any key to
return to the H/W
TEST MENU.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  33
Memory Clear
CAUTION: The procedures described in this area are security sensitive. Clearing all
or parts of the SPS-1000 memory may cause damage or loss to the program. Do not
share this information with unauthorized users and distribute the special S-Mode key
only to those you may want to perform these functions.
Memory All Clear
Complete clearing of all memory areas and installation of the default program can be done
through the following special procedure:
1. Turn the power switch located on the right side of the register to the OFF
position.
2. Turn the control lock to the unmarked position one position clockwise from the
PGM position.
3. Press and hold the key position where the CHECK key is located on the default
keyboard layout.
7
8
9
TND1
4
5
6
CHECK
TO MEMORY ALL CLEAR:
1
2
3
SBTL
0
00
.
CASH
Press and hold this key position
during power-up in S-mode.
4. While continuing to hold the CHECK key while turning the power switch to the
ON position.
5. Press the upper left key of the keyboard, then the lower left key, then the upper
right key, and finally press the lower right key.
34  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
1
3
2
4
6. The display will monitor the memory clear process, which takes about 1 minute.
When complete, the display will prompt “Enter Register Number (1-32)”. Type
the register number on the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The S-MODE
PROGRAMMING MENU will display.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  35
Selective Memory Clearing
The Memory Clear selection allows you to selectively clear various areas of the SPS-1000
memory.
1. Select MEMORY
CLEAR from the SMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
S-MODE MEMORY
CLEAR Screen.
2. Press PAGE DN to
view additional
allocation options, or
press the  or  keys
to locate the option
you wish to set.
3. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
Press the or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and press
ENTER.
4. The display will ask
you to confirm your
intentions to clear the
memory area by
asking CLEAR? [N].
Press the Y/N key
once to change the
selection to [Y], then
press ENTER to
complete the memory
clear.
36  S-Mode Programming
S-MODE MEMORY CLEAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR

ALL TTLS, CNTS & GRAND TTLS
TOTALS AND COUNTERS
GRAND TOTALS ONLY
ORDER TRACKING#1
ORDER TRACKING#2
ORDER TRACKING#3
ORDER TRACKING#4
PAID ORDER RECALL
PRODUCT PROJECTIONS
TIME-KEEPING
LOGO BITMAP IMAGE
PRE-POLL STATUS FLAG
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
S-MODE MEMORY CLEAR
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.

CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
PAID ORDER RECALL
PRODUCT PROJECTIONS
TIME-KEEPING
LOGO BITMAP IMAGE
PRE-POLL STATUS FLAG
PLU FILE
SUPER MACRO
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
INITIAL&POWER FAIL COUNTER
CONSECUTIVE#
GLOBAL ORDER NUMBER
ALL (1-10)
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Memory Allocation
CAUTION: The procedures described in this area are security sensitive. Memory is
automatically cleared after memory allocation is set. Do not change memory allocation
after your system has been installed unless you are aware that all programs, totals and
counters will be cleared. Do not share this information with unauthorized users and
distribute the special S-Mode key only to those you may want to perform these
functions.
1. Select MEMORY
ALLOCATION from
the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
MEMORY
ALLOCATION
PROGRAMMING
Screen.
2. Press PAGE DN to
view additional
allocation options, or
press the  or  keys
to locate the option
you wish to set.
3. Enter or select a new
value for the field.
MEMORY ALLOCATION PROGRAMMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
# OF DIGITS IN REPORT TOTALS(8-10)08
# OF DIGITS IN REPORT COUNTERS(6-8)6
# OF PLU
00100
# OF PLU STATUS GROUPS
0010
# OF PRICE LEVELS PER PLU (1-5)
5
PLU REPORT BY PRICE LEVEL
N
# OF EMPLOYEES
010
# OF TIME ENTRIES PER EMPLOYEE
024
USE GROUP BY EMPLOYEE
N
CHECK TRACKING METHOD :
HARD 
# OF TRACKING FILES (0-4)
1
REMAINING MEMORY IS
816 BYTES

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
MEMORY ALLOCATION PROGRAMMING
12. # OF LINES PER SOFT CHECK
050
13. # OF LINES PER TRANSACTION
100
14. MAXIMUM # OF CHECKS
TRACK 1
00020
TRACK 2
00020
TRACK 3
00020
TRACK 4
00020
15. # OF TIME PERIODS (24/48/96)
96
16. # OF PRODUCT MIX GROUPS
025
17 # OF PROD.MIX TIME PRDS (24/48/96)96
18. PROJECTIONS
N
REMAINING MEMORY IS
816 BYTES

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  37
4. Press ENTER to
accept the new entry
or press  to accept
the entry and advance
to the next field.
5. Press ESC to return
to the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU
.
MEMORY ALLOCATION PROGRAMMING
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
# OF WLU
010
# OF LINES PER WLU
028
# OF RECIPE
010
# OF INVENTORY INGREDIENT
025
# OF LINES FOR ELECT. JOURNAL 00000
# OF PAID RECALL TRANSACTIONS
00
# OF KEYSTROKES IN SUPER MACRO 0010
STORE BITMAP
N
EAT-IN BY TIME PERIODS
N
TAKE-OUT BY TIME PERIODS
N
DRIVE-THRU BY TIME PERIODS
N
REMAINING MEMORY IS
816 BYTES

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
MEMORY ALLOCATION PROGRAMMING
30. TRACK 1 BY TIME PERIODS
N
31. TRACK 2 BY TIME PERIODS
N
32. TRACK 3 BY TIME PERIODS
N
33. TRACK 4 BY TIME PERIODS
N
34. REPORT SELECTION TABLE
Y=YES, N=NO
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
FINANCIAL
Y Y N N N
EMPLOYEE
Y Y N N N
PLU
Y Y N N N
GROUP
Y Y N N N
GROUP BY TIME PERIOD N N N N N
TIME PERIOD
Y Y N N N
TIME KEEPING
Y Y N N N
REMAINING MEMORY IS
816 BYTES

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
38  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Memory Allocation Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
1
# OF DIGITS IN REPORT
TOTALS (8-10)
Determine the maximum size of report totals:
8, 9 or 10 digits.
2
# OF DIGITS IN REPORT
COUNTERS (6-8)
Your choice assumes two digits to the right of
the decimal. For example 6 digits =
XXXX.XX or 7 digits = XXXXX.XX.
3
# OF PLU
Determine the total # of PLUs, including
PLUs by code, by scanning or by
keyboard/keyboard level.
4
# OF PLU STATUS GROUPS
Determine the maximum number of status
groups to which you link PLUs. See "PLU
Status Group (PLU Status Link)" in "P-Mode
Programming" for more information.
5
# OF PRICE LEVELS PER
PLU (1-5)
Prices may be assigned at up to five different
price levels for each PLU. If you wish to use
price levels, you must determine the number
of price levels here. If Price levels are set,
they are set for all PLUs.
6
PLU REPORT BY PRICE
LEVEL
If selected, the PLU report will detail sales at
each level, rather than a total and counter for
sales at all levels combined.
7
# OF EMPLOYEES
Determine the total number of employees and
set the maximum use wish to use here.
Employees include all who use the register for
any purpose, including those using only the
time clock feature for clocking in/out.
8
# OF TIME ENTRIES PER
EMPLOYEE
Determine the maximum number of clock
entries that can be stored in the Z1 report.
After Z1, only summaries are stored on Z2
reports (or Z3, Z4 or Z5 reports, if
implemented.)
9
USE GROUP BY EMPLOYEE
Determine if you wish to report GROUPS by
EMPLOYEE. If you choose Y, then you can
report up to 30 of the 99 groups for each
employee. See "Groups By Employee" on
page 245 to select which groups will report
for each employee.
10
CHECK TRACKING METHOD
Choose HARD or SOFT. Hard checks store
only the check balances; soft check store
check detail for the number of lines
determined at step 12.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  39
FIELD
Notes
11
# OF TRACKING FILES
(0-4)
Select the number of separate tracking files
you wish to use. Select "0" for no check
tracking, additional files might be used for
table tracking, house account tracking, drive
through tracking, and/or phone order tracking.
12
# OF LINES PER SOFT
CHECK
Determine the maximum number of lines that
can be stored in each soft check. Note that
voided items also use lines in a check.
13
# OF LINES PER
TRNASACTION
Determine how many lines of receipt print
can be buffered for each transaction. If this
number is reached during a transaction, the
message "BUFFER FULL" will display and
the transaction must be finalized. Note: Must
be greater than or equal to the number of lines
per soft check. Note that voided items also
use lines in a check.
14
MAXIMUM # OF CHECKS
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
Determine the maximum number of check for
each tracking file.
15
# OF TIME PERIODS
(24/48/96)
Determine the number of periods the time
report is segmented into. For example, if you
wish hourly reports for 24 hours, choose 24.
The actual time for each period can be
customized. See "Time Period" in "P-Mode
Programming".
16
# OF PRODUCT MIX
GROUPS
Product Mix Groups can be used to
implement a simplified ingredient system for
tracking only essential ingredients associated
with items (i.e. cups for beverages or number
of pieces for chicken menus.) Enter the
number of Product Mix items you wish to
track here.
17
# OF PRODUCT MIX TIME
PERIODS
Product mix groups report usage by time
period. Determine the number of periods you
wish for product mix time reporting. The
actual time for each period can be customized.
See "Product Mix Group Time Periods" in "PMode Programming".
18
PROJECTIONS
The Product Projection report provides a
history of each product mix item's sales by
day of week. Determine if you wish to use
this report.
40  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
FIELD
Notes
19
# OF WLU
Enter the total number of WLUs you wish to
use here. WLUs are pop-up windows listing
PLUs, condiments, and/or functions. See
"Window Look Up (WLU)" in "P-Mode
Programming" for a complete discussion of
WLU applications.
20
# OF LINES PER WLU
The maximum number of lines per WLU is
50.
21
# OF RECIPE
Enter the maximum number of recipes you
wish to use if you are implementing an
ingredient inventory system. See "Ingredient
Inventory" in "P-Mode Programming" for
more information.
22
# OF INVENTORY
INGREDIENT
Enter the maximum number of inventory
ingredients you wish to use if you are
implementing an ingredient inventory system.
See "Ingredient Inventory" in "P-Mode
Programming" for more information.
23
# OF LINES FOR ELECT.
JOURNAL
If you wish to capture a sales journal in SPS1000 memory, enter the maximum size of the
electronic journal here. Also see "E.J.
(Electronic Journal) & Detail Printing
Options" in "P-Mode Programming" for
related options.
24
# OF PAID RECALL
TRANSACTIONS
Enter the number of preceding transactions (a
maximum of 99) that may be viewed by
repeatedly pressing the PAID RECALL key.
25
# OF KEYSTROKES IN
SUPER MACRO
Enter the number of transaction keystrokes,
including key position changes, to be
recorded in the super macro. When the super
macro memory is full, the most recent entries
will be added and the oldest discarded. Use
the super macro as a troubleshooting tool.
26
STORE BITMAP
If Y, reserves 12,300 bytes of memory
regardless of actual bitmap size.
27
EAT-IN BY TIME PERIODS
28
TAKE-OUT BY TIME
PERIODS
Options 27-33 enable reports detailing sales
Dollars and counts by type of sale for each
designated time period.
29
DRIVE-THRU BY TIME
PERIODS
30
TRACK 1 BY TIME PERIODS
31
TRACK 2 BY TIME PERIODS
32
TRACK 3 BY TIME PERIODS
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  41
FIELD
33
TRACK 4 BY TIME PERIODS
34
REPORT SELECTION TABLE
42  S-Mode Programming
Notes
Z2 represents accumulation of Z1 reports; Z3
represents accumulation of Z2 reports, etc.
You must select all levels below your highest
selected report level. For example, if you
select Z4 reporting for a particular report,
then you must also select Z1, Z2, and Z3 for
that report.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Keyboard Key Relocation
1. Select KEYBOARD
KEY RELOCATION
from the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
KEYBOARD KEY
RELOCATION
Screen.
2. Press a numeric digit
(1-3) or press the  or
 keys to move the
cursor to your choice.
Then press ENTER
to indicate whether
you wish to program
a PLU, WLU or
FUNCTION key.
3. A pop up window
displays the keyboard
level selection.
Select the keyboard
level you wish to
program, press
ENTER.
KEYBOARD KEY RELOCATION
1.
2.
3.
PLU KEYS
WLU KEYS
FUNCTION KEYS
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
KEYBOARD KEY RELOCATION
1.
2.
3.
PLU KEYS
WLU KEYS
FUNCTION KEYS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
1
2
3
4
5
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  43
PLU Key Relocation
This process accomplishes two purposes:

It changes the assignment of a key location to a PLU key. You can change an
existing Function key or WLU key into a PLU key by selecting any key on the
keyboard in this program.

It assigns the PLU number that is registered when this PLU key is operated. You
can also assign the PLU registered for a key in P-Mode. See “PLU and WLU
Key Assignment” in “P-Mode Programming”.
1. Press any key to read
and/or change the
current assignment;
or press ESC to exit.
PLU KEY RELOCATION PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1

PRESS ANY KEY TO READ AND/OR CHANGE
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
OR

2. Type the PLU
number you wish to
be registered (up to
14 digits) when this
PLU key is pressed.
Press ENTER to
assign the number, or
press ESC to exit
without changing the
current assignment.
PRESS ESC TO EXIT
PLU KEY RELOCATION PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL : 1
KEY POSITION :
CURRENT PLU#: 00000000000001
PLU1
1
ESC ENTER
44  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
3. The old and new
assignments for the
key you have just
programmed display.
Continue to program
additional PLU key
locations by pressing
another key.
4. Press ESC to exit. At
the prompt:
EXIT? [Y] press
ENTER.
PLU KEY RELOCATION PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1

PBESS ANY KEY TO READ AND/OR CHANGE
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
OR

PRESS ESC TO EXIT
KEY POSITION 13:
OLD ASSIGNMENT=PLU# 0000000000001
NEW ASSIGNMENT=PLU# 0000000000002
5. At the prompt:
SAVE KEY
RELOCATION? [Y]
press ENTER, or
press the Y/N key,
then press ENTER to
exit without saving
changes.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  45
WLU Key Relocation
This process accomplishes two purposes:

It changes the assignment of a key location to a WLU key. You can change an
existing Function key or PLU key into a WLU key by selecting any key on the
keyboard in this program.

It assigns the WLU number that is displayed when this WLU key is operated.
The WLU # assignment for a WLU key can also be set in P-Mode. See “PLU
and WLU Key Assignment” in “P-Mode Programming”.
WLU KEY RELOCATION PROGRAMMING
1. Press any key to read
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1
and/or change the
current assignment, or  PRESS ANY KEY TO READ AND/OR CHANGE
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
press ESC to exit.
OR

2. Type the WLU
number you wish to
be displayed when
this WLU key is
pressed. Press
ENTER to assign the
number, or press ESC
to exit without
changing the current
assignment.
PRESS ESC TO EXIT
WLU KEY RELOCATION PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL : 1
KEY POSITION :
CURRENT WLU#:
01
KEYCODE#013 ADD CHECK
1
The current function and
descriptor for this key are
displayed here.
ESC ENTER
46  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
3. The old and new
assignments for the
key you have just
programmed display.
Continue to program
additional WLU key
locations by pressing
another key.
4. Press ESC to exit. At
the prompt:
EXIT? [Y] press
ENTER.
WLU KEY RELOCATION PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1

PRESS ANY KEY TO READ AND/OR CHANGE
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
OR

PRESS ESC TO EXIT
KEY POSITION 13:
OLD ASSIGNMENT=KEYCODE#013 ADD CHECK
NEW ASSIGNMENT=WLU# 01
5. At the prompt:
SAVE KEY
RELOCATION? [Y]
press ENTER, or
press the Y/N key,
then press ENTER to
exit without saving
changes.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  47
Function Key Relocation
This process changes the assignment of any key. You can change an existing WLU key or
PLU key into a different function key by selecting any key on the keyboard in this program.
FUNCTION KEY RELOCATION PROGRAMMING
1. Press any key to read
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1
and/or change the
current assignment, or  PRESS ANY KEY TO READ AND/OR CHANGE
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
press ESC to exit.
OR

PRESS ESC TO EXIT
NOTE: You cannot change the assignment of an essential key (i.e. numeric key, Y/N,
cursor keys, ENTER, etc.) unless it is first located in a different position on the
keyboard.
48  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
2. The current
assignment displays
along with a window
from which you can
look up function
codes. If you do not
know the code of the
function you wish to
assign, press the
PAGE UP or PAGE
DN keys until the
code you wish to use
comes into view, or
see "Function Key
Program Summary"
In P-Mode
Programming for a
listing of function
codes.
FUNCTION RELOCATION LEVEL SELECTION
KEYBOARD LEVEL : 1
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
KEY POSITION :
112
: 201 RECD ACCT1
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
NUMERIC 8
NUMERIC 9
NUMERIC 0
NUMERIC 00
NUMERIC 000
ADD CHECK
BACK SPACE

ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN
3. Type a new key code
and press ENTER or
press ESC to exit.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  49
4. The old and new
assignments for the
key you have just
programmed display.
Continue to program
additional Function
key locations by
pressing another key.
5. Press ESC to exit. At
the prompt:
EXIT? [Y] press
ENTER.
FUNCTION KEY RELOCATION PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1

PRESS ANY KEY TO READ AND/OR CHANGE
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
OR

PRESS ESC TO EXIT
KEY POSITION 167:
OLD ASSIGNMENT=KEYCODE#021 CHECK
NEW ASSIGNMENT=KEYCODE#026 CURR.CONV1
6. At the prompt:
SAVE KEY
RELOCATION? [Y]
press ENTER, or
press the Y/N key,
then press ENTER to
exit without saving
changes.
50  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Function Key Code List
Code# & Function
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
NUMERIC 1
NUMERIC 2
NUMERIC 3
NUMERIC 4
NUMERIC 5
NUMERIC 6
NUMERIC 7
NUMERIC 7
NUMERIC 9
NUMERIC 0
NUMERIC 00
NUMERIC 000
ADD CHECK
BACK SPACE
BOLD
CANCEL
CAPS
CASH
TIP DECLARE
CHECK
CHECK CASH
CHECK ENDORSE
CLEAR
CONTINUE
CURR. CONV. 1
CURR. CONV. 2
CURR. CONV. 3
CURR. CONV. 4
CURR. CONV. 5
CURSOR DOWN ()
CURSOR LEFT ()
CURSOR RIGHT ()
CURSOR UP ()
DECIMAL (.)
DELETE
DONE
DRIVE THRU
EAT-IN
EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE 1
EMPLOYEE 2
EMPLOYEE 3
EMPLOYEE 4
EMPLOYEE 5
EMPLOYEE 6
EMPLOYEE 7
EMPLOYEE 8
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Code# & Function
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
EMPLOYEE 9
EMPLOYEE 10
ENTER
ERR.CORR
FD STMP SHIFT
FD STMP SBTL
FD STMP TEND
GUEST #
HOLD
INACTIVE (CAN RE-USE)
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1
KEYBOARD LEVEL 2
KEYBOARD LEVEL 3
KEYBOARD LEVEL 4
KEYBOARD LEVEL 5
LIST CHECK 1
LIST CHECK 2
LIST CHECK 3
LIST CHECK 4
MACRO OFF
MACRO P
MACRO PAUSE
MACRO R
MAC5RO S
MACRO SET
MACRO VOID
MACRO X
MACRO Z
MACRO 1
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
MACRO 5
MACRO 6
MACRO 7
MACRO 8
MACRO 9
MACRO 10
MACRO 11
MACRO 12
MACRO 13
MACRO 14
MACRO 15
MACRO 16
MACRO 17
MACRO 18
MACRO 19
MACRO 20
MACRO 21
Code# & Function
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
MACRO 22
MACRO 23
MACRO 24
MACRO 25
MACRO 26
MACRO 27
MACRO 28
MACRO 29
MACRO 30
MACRO 31
MACRO 32
MACRO 33
MACRO 34
MACRO 35
MACRO 36
MACRO 37
MACRO 38
MACRO 39
MACRO 40
MACRO #
MDSE RETURN
MISC TEND 1
MISC TEND 2
MISC TEND 3
MISC TEND 4
MISC TEND 5
MISC TEND 6
MISC TEND 7
MISC TEND 8
MISC TEND 9
MISC TEND 10
MISC TEND 11
MISC TEND 12
MISC TEND 13
MISC TEND 14
MISC TEND 15
MISC TEND 16
MISC TEND#
MODIFIER 1
MODIFIER 2
MODIFIER 3
MODIFIER 4
MODIFIER 5
MODIFIER 6
MODIFIER 7
MODIFIER 8
MODIFIER 9
MODIFIER 10
NEXT RECORD
S-Mode Programming  51
Code# & Function
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
157.
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
170.
171.
172.
173.
174.
175.
176.
177.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
185.
186.
187.
188.
189.
190.
191.
192.
193.
194.
195.
196.
#/NO SALE
P/BAL
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
PAID OUT 1
PAID OUT 2
PAID OUT 3
PAID OUT 4
PAID OUT 5
PAID RECALL
%1
%2
%3
%4
%5
%6
%7
%8
%9
% 10
PLU
PREV. RECORD
PRICE INQ
PRICE LVL1
PRICE LVL2
PRICE LVL3
PRICE LVL4
PRICE LVL5
PRICE LVL6
PRICE LVL7
PRICE LVL8
PRICE LVL9
PRICE LVL10
PRICE LVL11
PRICE LVL12
PRICE LVL13
PRICE LVL14
PRICE LVL15
PRICE LVL16
PRICE LVL17
PRICE LVL18
PRICE LVL19
PRICE LVL20
PRINT
PRINT CHECK
PRINT HOLD
PROMO
PRINT SCREEN
QUIT
RECEIPT ON/OFF
52  S-Mode Programming
Code# & Function
197.
198.
199.
200.
201.
202.
203.
204.
205.
206.
207.
208.
209.
210.
211.
212.
213.
214.
215.
216.
217.
218.
219.
220.
221.
222.
223.
224.
225.
226.
227.
228.
229.
230.
231.
232.
233.
234.
235.
236.
237.
238.
239.
240.
241.
242.
243.
244.
245.
246.
RECALL CHECK 1
RECALL CHECK 2
RECALL CHECK 3
RECALL CHECK 4
RECD ACCT 1
RECD ACCT 2
RECD ACCT 3
RECD ACCT 4
RECD ACCT 5
RECEIPT
REPEAT
SCALE
SEAT #
SHIFT
SPLIT ITEM
SPLIT PAYMENT
STOCK INQ
STORE CHECK 1
STORE CHECK 2
STORE CHECK 3
STORE CHECK 4
SUBTOTAL
TABLE # 1
TABLE # 2
TABLE # 3
TABLE # 4
TAKE-OUT
TAX EXEMPT
TAX SHIFT 1
TAX SHIFT 2
TAX SHIFT 3
TAX SHIFT 4
TAX SHIFT 5
TAX SHIFT 6
TIME IN/OUT
TIP 1
TIP 2
TIP 3
TRANS CHK1
TRANS CHK2
TRANS CHK3
TRANS CHK4
TRAY SUBTOTAL
VALIDATE
VOID ITEM
WASTE
WLU
X/TIME
YES/NO
PARK ORDER
Code# & Function
247.
248.
249.
250.
251.
252.
253.
SERVE ORDER
KP ROUTING
SPLIT CHECK
ALPHA TEXT
NOTFOUND PLU
NEXT DOLLAR
PRINT ALL
SPS 1000 Program Manual
System Options
1. Select SYSTEM
OPTIONS from the
S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
S-MODE SYSTEM
OPTIONS Screen.
2. Press the    
keys to select a field
to edit.
3. Type a new value and
press ENTER or
press the  key to
accept the entry and
advance to the next
field.
4. Press PAGE DN to
view the second page
of S-MODE
SYSTEM OPTIONS.
5. Press PAGE DN to
view the last page of
S-MODE SYSTEM
OPTIONS.
6. Press ESC to exit.
S-MODE SYSTEM OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

REGISTER # (01-32)
01
STORE #
000000
IRC : FROM REGISTER #
00
IRC : TO REGISTER #
00
IRC # OF RETRIES
00
PRINT/DISPLAY DECIMAL POSITION : 2
SEND PLU DESCRIPTOR WHEN POLLED
Y
PASSWORD (0000=NO PASSWORD) X =0000
Z1=0000
Z2=0000
Z3=0000
Z4=0000
Z5=0000
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
S-MODE SYSTEM OPTIONS
9. REG# HOLDS TIME IN/OUT DATA
00
10. REG# HOLDS CHECK TRACKING DATA
CHECK#1
00
CHECK#2
00
CHECK#3
00
CHECK#4
00
11. REG# HOLDS BACKUP CHECK TRACK DATA
CHECK#1
00
CHECK#2
00
CHECK#3
00
CHECK#4
00
12. REG# HOLDS KP GLOBAL ORDER#
00
13. REG# HOLDS DATATRAN TERMINAL
01

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
S-MODE SYSTEM OPTIONS
14.
15.
16.
17.

SPS 1000 Program Manual
DISPLAY PRINTER ERROR WHEN POLLING Y
LCD REFRESH RATE N:HIGH Y:LOW
N
MSR IS CONNECTED TO
DATATRAN
PINPAD IS CONNECTED TO
DATATRAN
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
S-Mode Programming  53
System Option Program Notes (S-Mode)
FIELD
Notes
PRINT/DISPLAY
DECIMAL POSITION
Select 0, 1, 2 or 3 from the pop-up window. The
default value is 2 (XX.XX).
REG# HOLDS KP
GLOBAL ORDER#
If global order number is implemented (see P-Mode
System Options) then the register indicated contains the
global number system.
LCD REFRESH RATE
N:HIGH Y:LOW
Allow greater operator display contrast control.
54  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Printer Driver Selections
This program allows you to change the commands for specific printers, or to set up a new
printer by using generic (1-5) settings.
1. Select PRINTER
DRIVER
SELECTIONS from
the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PRINTER DRIVER
SELECTIONS
screen.
2. The drivers for the
selected printer
display. Press the 
or  keys to select the
printer for which you
wish to view or edit
commands. If
necessary, press
PAGE DN to view
additional printers.
PRINTER DRIVER SELECTIONS
PRINTER TYPE
SAM SRP-100
INITIALIZE
SAM SRP-250
COMPRESSED
SAM SRP-350
RED/REV
CITIZEN 3551 EXPANDED
CITIZEN 810
BOLD
CITIZEN 230
UNDERLINE
EPSON T88-2
LONG FEED
EPSON U200
FULL CUT
EPSON U295
PART. CUT
EPSON U300
STANDARD
EPSON U325
LOGO


SPS 1000 Program Manual
CANCEL
1B2120 IB2100
1B5501 1B5500
1B64
IB69
1B69
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
PRINTER DRIVER SELECTIONS
PRINTER TYPE
EPSON U325
EPSON U375
STAR SP-200
STAR SP-298
STAR SP-300
STAR TSP-200
GENERIC #1
GENERIC #2
GENERIC #3
GENERIC #4
GENERIC #5
START
IB40
INITIALIZE
COMPRESSED
RED/REV
EXPANDED
BOLD
UNDERLINE
LONG FEED
FULL CUT
PARTIAL CUT
STANDARD
LOGO
START
CANCEL
IB40
1B7201
1B2120
1B4501
1B5501
1B64
1B69
IB69
IB7200
IB2100
IB4500
1B5500
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
S-Mode Programming  55
Changing Printer Commands
1. With options for a
printer in view, press
the ENTER key to
move the active
cursor to the first
command field in the
start column.
2. Press the    
keys to select the
field you wish to edit.
Type new command
information and press
ENTER.
PRINTER DRIVER SELECTIONS
PRINTER TYPE
EPSON U325
EPSON U375
STAR SP-200
STAR SP-298
STAR SP-300
STAR TSP-200
GENERIC #1
GENERIC #2
GENERIC #3
GENERIC #4
GENERIC #5

INITIALIZE
COMPRESSED
RED/REV
EXPANDED
BOLD
UNDERLINE
LONG FEED
FULL CUT
PARTIAL CUT
STANDARD
LOGO
START
CANCEL
IB40
1B7201
1B2120
1B4501
1B5501
1B64
1B69
IB69
IB7200
IB2100
IB4500
1B5500
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press ESC to return
the active cursor to
the PRINTER TYPE.
Press ESC again to
return to the SMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU.
56  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Serial Port Device Selections
Use the Serial Port Device Selections program to define the type of device that is attached to
each serial port.
1. Select SERIAL
PORT DEVICE
SELECTIONS from
the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
SERIAL PORT
DEVICE
SELECTIONS
screen.
2. Press the  or  keys
to select the port you
wish to view or edit.
3. To change a port
selection, press
ENTER to move the
active cursor to the
device selection
column.
4. Press the  or  keys
to select a new
device, press
ENTER.
SERIAL PORT DEVICE SELECTIONS
PORT
---PORT#1
PORT#2
PORT#3
PORT#4
PORT#5
PORT#6
PORT#7

ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SERIAL PORT DEVICE SELECTIONS
PORT
---PORT#1
PORT#2
PORT#3
PORT#4
PORT#5
PORT#6
PORT#7

SPS 1000 Program Manual
DEVICE
-----------DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DEVICE
------------ -------DISABLE
PRINTER
VIDEO
POLLING
SCALE
SCANNER
EFT TERMINAL
CHANGER
POLL DISPLAY
LIQUOR
MCR
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
S-Mode Programming  57
5. If there are multiples
of the selected device
(i.e. many types of
printers) the options
will display.
6. Press the  or  keys
to select a new type
and press ENTER to
accept the new
selection.
7. Press ESC to return
to the SERIAL PORT
DEVICE
SELECTIONS screen
with port selection
active.
SERIAL PORT DEVICE SELECTIONS
PORT
---PORT#1
PORT#2
PORT#3
PORT#4
PORT#5
PORT#6
PORT#7

DEVICE
-----------DISABLE
PRINTER
VIDEO
POLLING
SCALE
SCANNER
EFT TERMINAL
CHANGER
POLL DIS
PRINTER TYPES
-------------SAM SRP-100
SAM SRP-250
SAM SRP-350
CITIZEN 3551
CITIZEN 810
CITIZEN 230
EPSON T88-2
EPSON U200
EPSON U295
EPSON U300
EPSON U325
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
8. Press ESC again to
return to the SMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU.
58  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Define Serial Port Parameters
Choose Define Serial Port Parameters to set the baud rate, parity, and other options for each
serial port.
1. Select SERIAL
PORT DEVICE
SELECTIONS from
the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
SERIAL PORT
DEVICE
SELECTIONS
screen. The current
selections for
PORT#1 display.
2. Press the PAGE UP
or PAGE DN keys to
select the port you
wish to view or edit.
SERIAL PORT#1 PARAMENTER SELECTIONS
PORT DESCRIPTION
BAUD RATE
009600 
PARITY
NONE 
DATA BITS
8
STOP BITS
1
RETRYS
00
FEED LINES BEFORE PRINTING
00
FEED LINES AFTER PRINTING
07
PRINT BITMAP?
N
LOGO SIZE (0-3)
0
LINES ON "HARD" SLIP
00
CUTTING AFTER PRINTING?
Y
IN CASE OF PRINTER, KICK THE DRAWER?
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press the  or  keys
to move the active
cursor to the option
you wish to change.
4. Type a new value for
a field and press
ENTER, or if an
arrow () displays
next to the current
selection, press
ENTER to display a
list of choices.
5. Press ESC to return
to the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  59
Serial Port Parameters Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
BAUD RATE
Select 2400, 9600, 19200, 28800, 33600, 56000 or
OTHER from the pop-up window. (9600 is default.)
If you select OTHER, you may enter your own value.
PARITY
Select NONE, EVEN, or ODD from the pop-up
window; NONE is default.
DATA BITS
Select 8 or 7 from the pop-up window; 8 is default.
STOP BITS
Select 1 or 2 from the pop-up window; 1 is default.
LOGO SIZE (0-3)
Controls the size of bitmap image that may be printed
on the guest check.
LINES ON “HARD” SLIP
If hard check system is used, printing will stop on the
guest check after the number of print lines indicated
here is printed. Use this option to prevent over
printing when the bottom of the guest check is used as
a tear off receipt.
IN CASE OF PRINTER,
KICK THE DRAWER?
Allows printer to send the drawer kick signal.
60  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Program Scan Printing
This function allows you to print copies of the register's S-Mode programming.
1. Select S-MODE
PROGRAM SCAN
PRINTING from the
S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
S-MODE
PROGRAM SCAN
PRINTING screen.
S-MODE PROGRAM SCAN PRINTING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
MEMORY ALLOCATION
SYSTEM OPTIONS
PRINTER DRIVER SELECTIONS
SERIAL PORT DEVICE SELECTIONS
SERIAL PORT PARAMETERS
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and press
ENTER.
3. After selection the
appropriate report is
printed.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  61
System Password
The system password allows service access to all of the functions of the SPS 1000. For
example, use the system password:

If you are servicing a users system and you do not know an employee code
that allow you to access necessary functions.

If authority level programming prohibits you from accessing functions you
need to access in order to complete your tasks.
Sign the system password to allow access to all SPS 1000 functions (except register mode
operations.) After you have completed your session, the system password must be signed off
through normal sign off procedures before another employee may be signed on.
If you wish to block system password access, program 0000 in the system password
field.
1. Select SYSTEM
PASSWORD from
the S-MODE MENU
to set the system
password.
SYSTEM PASSWORD
SYSTEM PASSWORD (0000=NO PASSWORD)
9999
2. Enter a 4-digit
password, if desired.
3. Press ENTER to
return to the SMODE MENU.
ESC ENTER
62  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Super Macro Scan
The super macro records transaction keystrokes, including key position changes. The size of
the super macro, in keystrokes, is set in memory allocation (see "Memory Allocation" on
page 37.) When the super macro memory is full, the most recent entries will be added and
the oldest discarded. The super macro is a troubleshooting tool.
Use this program to view or print the contents of super macro memory.
1. Select SUPER
MACRO SCAN from
the S-MODE MENU
to view or print the
super macro.
SUPER MACRO SCAN
1.
2.
SUPER MACRO DISPLAY
SUPER MACRO PRINTING
2. Choose an item from
the menu.
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. If SUPER MACRO
PRINTING is
selected the macro
contents will print.
If SUPER MACRO
DISPLAY is selected,
the contents will
display as in the
example on the right.
4. Press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN to view
the entire contents.
Press ESC to exit to
the SUPER MACRO
SCAN screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
SUPER MACRO DISPLAY
#
---0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
KEY
---------------MACRO S
NUMERIC 1
NUMERIC 1
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
CUR DOWN
ENTER
CUR UP
ENTER
ESC PAGE UP/DN
S-Mode Programming  63
ROM File Download
Choose ROM FILE DOWNLOAD to down load the EPROM to all satellite registers in the
IRC system.
Warning: This procedure will clear all totals, counters and programs from the satellite
registers.
Bitmap File Download
Choose BITMAP FILE DOWNLOAD to down load the bitmap image to a printer.
1. Choose BITMAP
FILE DOWNLOAD
to down load the
bitmap image to a
printer. The
BITMAP FILE
DOWNLOAD screen
displays.
BITMAP FILE DOWNLOAD
2. Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
the port to which the
printer is attached,
then press ENTER.
PORT#1
PORT#2
PORT#3
PORT#4
PORT#5
PORT#6
PORT#7
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Load Default Messages
1. Choose LOAD DEFAULT MESSAGES from the S-MODE PROGRAMMING
MENU to reload the default error messages and system descriptors.
2. At the message ARE YOU SURE?, press the YES/NO once to select Y, and then
press ENTER. The default messages are loaded.
64  S-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Check Unlock
If the register where a check is being posted fails before the check is finalized, the check
cannot be accessed at another register until a check unlock procedure is done.
1. Choose CHECK
UNLOCK. The
CHECK UNLOCK
screen displays.
2. Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
the port to which the
printer is attached,
then press ENTER.
CHECK UNLOCK
1.
2.
3.
4.
TRACK#1
TRACK#2
TRACK#3
TRACK#4
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
S-Mode Programming  65
P-Mode Programming
P-Mode Programming Menu
1. Turn the key to the
PGM position.
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and press
ENTER.
NOTE: There are three
pages on the P-MODE
programming menu.
B P-MODE PROGRAMMING MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-MODE PROGRAMMING MENU
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.

SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU
PLU STATUS GROUP
GROUP
FUNCTION KEY
SYSTEM OPTION
TAXES
MESSAGES
WINDOW LOOK UP (WLU)
TIME PERIOD
EMPLOYEE
AUTHORITY LEVEL
PRINTER TABLES & KV ROUTING
INGREDIENT INVENTORY
TIME ACTIVATED FUNCTIONS
PRODUCT MIX GROUPS
CUSTOM REPORT
STRING REP0RT
PLU STOCK
PLU MINIMUM STOCK
COPY PROGRAM
PROGRAM FILE DOWNLOAD
P-MODE PROGRAM SCAN PRINTING
NON-PLU CODE
PLU & WLU KEY RELOCATION
ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  67
P-MODE PROGRAMMING MENU
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.

68  P-Mode Programming
PLU STOCK
PLU MINIMUM STOCK
COPY PROGRAM
PROGRAM FILE DOWNLOAD
P-MODE PROGRAM SCAN PRINTING
NON-PLU CODE
PLU & WLU KEY RELOCATION
BITMAP FILE DOWNLOAD
GROUPS BY EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE CARD READ FORMAT
AGE VERIFICATION
MIX & MATCH TABLE
ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU Programming
The maximum number of PLUs available is determined in memory allocation. (See
"Memory Allocation" in "S-Mode Programming".) Each PLU can be assigned a code
number up to 14 digits in length.
1. Select PLU from the
P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PLU
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Press a numeric digit
(1-2) or press the  or
 keys to move the
cursor to ADD &
CHANGE or
DELETE, and then
press ENTER.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU PROGRAMMING
1. ADD & CHANGE
2 DELETE
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  69
Add & Change
1. Select ADD &
CHANGE to access
an existing PLU or
program a new PLU.
2. Select the PLU to be
programmed by
entering the number
or pressing the PLU
key on the keyboard.
PLU#00000000000000 PROGRAMMING

PRESS THE PLU TO BE PROGRAMMED
OR

ENTER THE PLU NUMBER AND PRESS ENTER
OR

ENTER THE PLU NUMBER AND PRESS PLU#
PLU# ESC ENTER INDIVIDUAL PLU
3. Press the    
keys to select the
field you wish to
program.
4. Type a new value and
press ENTER or
press cursor down ()
to accept the entry
and advance to the
next field.
5. Select another PLU to
program by entering
the PLU number and
pressing ENTER, or
by pressing PAGE
UP or PAGE DN
until the PLU you
wish to program is
displayed.
PLU#00000000000001 PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTOR:
PLU1
GROUP LINK #1
00
PLU STATUS LINK #
001
PIECE COUNT
000 RECIPE#
00
ACTIVATE WLU#
00
INACTIVE
N
PRESET?
N
ALLOW PRESET/HALO OVERRIDE?
N
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#1? 01
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#2? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#3? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#4? 00
PRICE/HALO 000000.00
PRICE LEVEL#5? 00
PLU# ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
6. Press ESC to return
to the PLU#
PROGRAMMING
screen.
70  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
DESCRIPTOR
Enter a descriptor up to 16 characters in length. Note
that the method you use to enter the descriptor depends
upon your selection for General Function Option #15
(see “General Function Options” on page 116.)

The default method is by using the Alpha Keyboard
Overlay. Type the descriptor using the typewriterstyle keyboard on the overlay.

GROUP LINK #1
If Alpha Code Entry is selected as an alternative,
type the codes representing each character, see
“Entering Alpha Characters” in the “Getting Started”
chapter for a list of alpha codes.
Enter the primary reporting group for the GROUPS and
PLU BY GROUP reports.

There are 99 groups available for reporting.

If you wish to assign a PLU to more than one
reporting group, assign the PLU to a PLU STATUS
LINK# that contains the necessary assignments for
GROUP LINK #2 and GROUP LINK #3. (See
“PLU Status Group” on page 39.)
PLU STATUS LINK #
The status link group contains the remainder of the
configurable options for this PLU. See "PLU Status
Group" on page 39.
PIECE COUNT
Enter a value in this field if you wish to use Product
Mix and Product Projection reporting. The number of
units entered here will be reflected in product mix
reporting.
SPS 1000 Program Manual

See “PLU Status Group” on page 39 to select
product mix items for this PLU item.

See “Product Mix Groups” on page 215 to set up
product mix items and time periods.
P-Mode Programming  71
FIELD
Notes
RECIPE#
A menu-explosion type inventory system is set up when
PLUs are assigned to a recipe number. Note the
following related programs and activities:

See “Ingredient Inventory” on page 41 to maintain
the ingredient list with unit costs and the recipe
tables.

See “Edit Inventory Item” in the “X-Mode
Procedures” chapter of the SPS 1000 Operation
Manual to manage receipts, transfers and waste as
well as view actual inventory and unit cost.

Use report # 41, the Inventory Report to report the
status of inventory items.

Use report #43, the Food Cost Report, to report the
cost of PLU item using the information from the
assigned recipe.
ACTIVATE WLU#
Enter the number of a WLU that you wish to activate
immediately after this PLU is registered. For example,
if this item requires a condiment selection, enter the
number of the WLU that contains a list of condiments
available for this item. See “WLU Programming” on
page 169 to program the items that are listed in each
WLU.
PRICE/HALO
Enter the preset price if the item is preset. Enter the
HALO (High Amount Lock Out) if the item is not
preset, or if PRESET/HALO OVERRIDE is allowed.
PRICE LEVEL #1-#5
Prices may be assigned at up to five different price
levels for each item. Enter the number (1-20) of the
PRICE LVL key that you wish to register the associated
PRICE/HALO. If you are not using price levels, enter
the price or HALO in the first price field, adjacent to
the PRICE LEVEL#1? field, and leave the default value
of “01” in the PRICE LEVEL #1? field.
72  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Delete PLUs
1. From the PLU
PROGRAMMING
SCREEN, select
DELETE.
PLU PROGRAMMING
1. ADD & CHANGE
2. DELETE
1. PLU DELETE ONE BY ONE
2. PLU DELETE BY RANGE
2. Press a numeric digit
(1-2) or press the  or
 keys to move the
cursor to PLU
DELETE ONE BY
ONE or PLU
DELETE BY
RANGE, then press
ENTER.
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
PLU Delete One By One
1. Type the PLU
number to be deleted,
press ENTER.
PLU DELETE PLU#00000000000000
DESCRIPTOR :
2. The message PRESS
ENTER TO DELETE
displays. Press
ENTER again, or
press ESC to exit
without deleting the
PLU.
3. Continue from step 2
if there are additional
PLUs to delete, or
press ESC to return
to the PLU
PROGRAMMING
screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU# ESC ENTER INDIVIDUAL PLU
P-Mode Programming  73
PLU Delete by Range
1. Enter the beginning
number of the range
to be deleted in the
FROM PLU # field,
press ENTER.
2. Enter the ending
number of the range
to be deleted in the
TO PLU # field, press
ENTER.
PLU PROGRAMMING
1. ADD & CHANGE
2. DELETE
1. PLU DELETE ONE BY ONE
2. PLU DELETE BY RANGE
FROM PLU # 00000000000000
TO
PLU # 00000000000000
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
74  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU Status Group (PLU Status Link)
PLU Status Groups allow memory to be used more efficiently. In most applications, large
groups of PLUs are set with many identical options, while the PLU number, descriptor and
price are unique. On the PLU Programming Screen (see "PLU" on page 69) each PLU is
assigned its' descriptor, price or prices and a few unique options. The remainder of the PLU
options are determined by linking the individual PLU to a PLU Status Group. The PLU
Status Group contains all of the detailed programming option selections that might be
assigned to an individual PLU. Separate PLU Status Groups can be set up to accommodate
the needs of groups of PLUs. Like PLUs, the total number of PLU Status Groups is
determined by memory allocation.
The maximum number of PLU Status Groups available (up to 9999) is determined in memory
allocation. (See "Memory Allocation" in "S-Mode Programming".)
1. Select PLU STATUS
GROUP from the PMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PLU STATUS
GROUP#
PROGRAMMING
screen. Data for the
first status group
displays.
PLU STATUS GROUP#
DESCRIPTOR :
PLU STS 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. TAXABLE BY TAX RATES?
N N N N N N
2. GROUP LINK #2
00
3. GROUP LINK #3
00
4. ARE PLUS IN THIS GROUP INACTIVE?
N
5. IS PLU A CONDIMENT?
N
6. COMPULSORY CONDIMENT ENTRY?
N
7. IS PLU SINGLE ITEM?
N
8. IS PLU NEGATIVE?
N
9. IS PLU HASH?
N
10. DOES PLU USE GALLONAGE?
N

2. Select a PLU status
group in one of two
ways:
Type a PLU Status
Group number and
press ENTER.
Or, press PAGE UP
or PAGE DN keys to
scroll through the
PLU STATUS
GROUP file
sequentially.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
1
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
PLU STATUS GROUP#
23
DESCRIPTION:
HOT FOOD GROUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. TAXABLE BY TAX RATES?
N N N N N N
2. GROUP LINK #2
00
3. GROUP LINK #3
00
4. ARE PLUS IN THIS GROUP INACTIVE?
N
5. IS PLU A CONDIMENT?
N
6. COMPULSORY CONDIMENT ENTRY?
N
7. IS PLU SINGLE ITEM?
N
8. IS PLU NEGATIVE?
N
9. IS PLU HASH?
N
10. DOES PLU USE GALLONAGE?
N

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  75
3. Press PAGE DN to
view the second page
of PLU Status Group
options, or press the 
or  keys to locate the
option you wish to
set.
Type a new value and
press ENTER or
press  to accept the
entry and advance to
the next field.
4. Press PAGE DN to
view the third page of
PLU Status Group
options, or Press the
 or  to locate the
option you wish to
set.
PLU STATUS GROUP#
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.

IS PLU FOOD STAMP ELIGIBLE?
N
IS PLU MEMO?
N
IS PLU SCALEABLE?
N
AUTO SCALE ON THIS PLU?
N
AUTO TARE# (0-20)
00
STOCK PLU?
N
LINK PLU#
00000000000000
PRODUCT MIX #1
00
PRODUCT MIX #2
00
NEGATIVE INVENTORY?
N
ALLOW PROMO?
Y
ALLOW WASTE?
Y
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
PLU STATUS GROUP#
23
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
ALLOW DISCOUNT?
Y
ALLOW SURCHARGE?
Y
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
IS NON-ADD# COMPULSORY?
N
PRINT ON KV?
N
KITCHEN VIDEO GROUP #
000
COLOR TO DISPLAY ON KV (0-31)
00
PRINT ON KP?
N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
31. PRINT ON KP#
N N N N N N N N N
32. PRINT RED ON KITCHEN PRINTERS?
N
33. PRINT RED ON RECEIPT?
N

76  P-Mode Programming
23
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
5. Press PAGE DN to
view the last page of
PLU Status Group
options, or Press the
 or  keys to locate
the option you wish
to set.
6. Select another PLU
Status Group to
program or press
ESC to save changes
and return to the PMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU STATUS GROUP#
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.

23
PRINT ON RECEIPT?
Y
PRINT ON JOURNAL?
Y
DISPLAY ON REGISTER SCREEN?
Y
PRINT ON GUEST CHECKS?
Y
PRINT PRICE ON GUEST CHECKS?
Y
PRINT PRICE ON RECEIPT/DETAIL?
Y
AUTO GRILL?
N
AUTO GRILL KP #
0
ELIGIBLE FOR CANADIAN DONUT LAW?
N
AGE VERIFICATION (0-5)
0
MIX & MATCH TABLE #
0
IS PLU GIFT CARD
ADD
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  77
PLU Status Group Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
TAXABLE BY TAX RATES?
(1-6)
Select Y or N for each tax rate to determine if
the appropriate tax(es) is automatically
calculated when the item is sold.
2
3
GROUP LINK #2
GROUP LINK #3
If you wish to direct PLU sales to more than
one group, enter the second or third reporting
group for the GROUPS and PLU BY GROUP
reports here. Note the following related
programs:

See “PLU Programming” on page 69 to
program the first reporting group for each
PLU.

See “Group” on page 83 to determine
whether each individual group adds to the
group total on the financial report.
4
ARE PLUs IN THIS GROUP
INACTIVE?
Select Y if you wish PLUs reported to this
group to be inactive (cannot be registered).
5
IS PLU A CONDIMENT?
Condiments PLUs are different from noncondiment PLUs in the manner they display
and print during operations. Non-condiment
PLUs are used for “main” items. Condiment
items are indented and displayed/printed
below a main item so that condiments or
cooking instructions are easily understood for
each “main” item.
6
COMPULSORY CONDIMENT
ENTRY?
If Y, then a condiment entry must follow the
registration of a PLU.
7
IS PLU SINGLE ITEM?
The transaction is finalized automatically
when a single item PLU is registers as the
first item in a sale.
8
IS PLU NEGATIVE?
Negative PLUs subtract from a sale, rather
than add to a sale.
9
IS PLU HASH?
HASH PLUs do not affect certain totals in
reports. See General Function Option #7 to
determine specifically which totals are
impacted by HASH PLUs.
78  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
#
FIELD
Notes
10
DOES PLU USE
GALLONAGE?
Gallonage PLUs must be set as open PLUs.
The PRICE/HALO must be set as the price
per gallon. (The price is set at three decimal
places, however the PLU programming screen
will always display in a two digit decimal
format. For example if a PLU is gallonage, a
price of $1.299 per gallon would be set as
"12.99".) Gallonage PLUs will report the
gallons sold in the activity counter on the
PLU report by dividing the PLU total by the
price per gallon.
11
IS PLU FOOD STAMP
ELIGIBLE?
A separate itemizer keeps a running total of
food stamp eligible items in each transaction.
Then if the sale is paid by food stamps, the
food stamp eligible subtotal can be recalled.
12
IS PLU MEMO?
Use Memo PLUs to display a descriptor on
the screen or print a descriptor at a printer.
Memo PLUs do not add to any total in the
SPS 1000.
13
IS PLU SCALEABLE?
Choose Y if you wish to multiply items
reporting to this group by a weight from a
scale connected to the register. Scale weights
are entered by pressing the SCALE key.
14
AUTO SCALE ON THIS PLU?
If Y, registrations of PLUs linked to this
group will automatically multiply by the
weight placed upon a scale connected to the
register.
15
AUTO TARE# (0-20)
If Y, the tare # indicated here will
automatically subtract from the weight from
the scale. See “Scale” on page 108 to preset
tare weights.
16
STOCK PLU?
Choose Y if you wish to track PLU stock,
where each whole unit PLU activity subtracts
a value of "1" from the stock counter. (Note
that if multiplication or decimal multiplication
is used when the PLU is registered, the
resulting quantity of activity will subtract
from the stock counter. Stock is maintained
in increments to the second decimal position,
i.e. “X.XX”.) See “PLU Stock” on page 225
for more information.
17
LINK PLU#
If you wish the registration of the PLU
assigned to this PLU status group to
automatically cause the registration of another
PLU, enter the number of the PLU you wish
to register automatically here.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  79
#
FIELD
Notes
18
19
PRODUCT MIX #1
PRODUCT MIX #2
If you are using product mix reporting, enter
the number of the product mix item or items
here. Note the following related programs
and activities:

See “Product Mix Groups” on page 215
to set up product mix items.

See “PLU Programming” on page 69 to
enter the number of pieces to be counted
to the product mix item with each
activity.

See Report #35, Product Mix Report to
report product mix item usage.

See Report #36, Product Projections for a
history of each item's sales by day of
week.
20
NEGATIVE INVENTORY?
Use this option only if you are using the
recipe and ingredient inventory system and
you are using PLUs to designate subtractions
from a menu item. For example, a PLU may
be designated "No Cheese" by designating a
PLU to print this instruction. By assigning
the "No Cheese" PLU to a PLU Status Group
with this setting at Y (yes), the inventory
records for cheese will be maintained
correctly.
21
ALLOW PROMO?
Choose Y if you wish to allow the PROMO
operation, i.e. buy two, get one free. PROMO
activity will remove the item cost from the
sale, but the count will include the promo
item.
22
ALLOW WASTE?
If Y, the WASTE function is allowed on
PLUs reporting to this group.
23
ALLOW DISCOUNT?
If Y, the operation of an item discount after
registration of a PLU reporting to this group
is allowed.
24
ALLOW SURCHARGE?
If Y, the operation of an item surcharge after
registration of a PLU reporting to this group
is allowed.
25
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION?
If Y, validation must be performed after
registration of a PLU reporting to this group
before any other register activity is allowed.
26
IS NON-ADD#
COMPULSORY?
If Y, a numeric entry must be made into the
Non-Add # key before registration of a PLU
reporting to this group is allowed
80  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
#
FIELD
Notes
27
PRINT ON KV?
Select Y if PLUs in this group are to be sent
to a kitchen video.
28
KITCHEN VIDEO GROUP#
Select the kitchen video group to which PLUs
in this group are to be sent. Condiment PLUs
with a "0" status here will "follow" the last
main item.
29
COLOR TO DISPLAY ON KV
(0-31)
The color code set here will control the color
or screen format displayed on an optional
kitchen video system requisition screen.
Color codes vary by KVS system. Refer to
the documentation for your video system for
specific information.
30
PRINT ON KP?
Select Y if PLUs in this group are to be sent
to a kitchen printer.
31
PRINT ON KP#
Select the kitchen printer group or groups to
which PLUs in this group are to be sent.
32
PRINT RED ON KITCHEN
PRINTERS?
Set to Y if you wish PLUs in this group to
print in red on the kitchen printer, i.e.
condiments might be printed red. Red/black
printer must be used.
33
PRINT RED ON RECEIPT?
Set to Y if you wish PLUs in this group to
print in red on the receipt. Red/black printer
must be used.
34
PRINT ON RECEIPT?
Must be set to Y for PLUs in this group to
print on the receipt.
35
PRINT ON JOURNAL?
Must be set to Y for PLUs in this group to
print on the journal or collect in the electronic
journal.
36
DISPLAY ON REGISTER
SCREEN?
Set to N if you wish the registration of PLUs
in this group not to display on the register
operator screen.
37
PRINT ON GUEST CHECKS?
Must be set to Y for PLUs in this group to
print on the guest check.
38
PRINT PRICE ON GUEST
CHECKS?
Prints the descriptor only, rather than
descriptor and price on guest checks.
39
PRINT PRICE ON
RECEIPT/DETAIL?
Prints descriptor only, rather than descriptor
and price on receipt and detail.
40
AUTO GRILL
Select Y for this option to send items in this
group to the kitchen printer designated in the
next field. Items are sent with a one-item
delay (at the next item or at subtotal.)
41
AUTO GRILL KP #
Enter the kitchen printer number for printing
of auto grill items.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  81
#
FIELD
Notes
42
ELIGIBLE FOR CANADIAN
DONUT LAW
Special Provincial or State sales tax laws
might change the taxable status of an item
depending upon the quantity sold. Donuts,
for example, might be taxable when sold
individually at a bakery. However, if a
customer purchases a dozen, the food sale is
considered non-taxable.
In such a case select Y in this field, and also
select Y to the appropriate tax status. Also,
set tax option #3 (see "Tax Options" on page
122) with the quantity at which you wish tax
to be exempted, for example 12. Registration
of PLUs reported to this status group will
charge tax until the quantity with the
transaction reaches 12. When 12 or more are
registered, all will be sold without tax.
43
AGE VERIFICATION
Enter 1-5 to set the age category. The
operator will be forced to enter a date of birth
that indicates an age higher than the age of
this category before items assigned to this
group can be entered. See "Age Verification"
on page 247 to set the minimum age for each
of up to 5 categories.
44
MIX & MATCH TABLE #
If PLUs linked to this group are part of a
mix/match discount, enter the table of the
discount here.
45
IS PLU GIFT CARD
If an integrated gift application is used, a PLU
must be created and linked to a status group
with the appropriate (Activate or Add)
function. Operations into this PLU are used
to begin or add to an existing gift card.
82  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Group
Groups are designated to accumulate PLU sales for convenient reporting totals. A PLU can
send its' sales information to up to 3 groups. Group Link #1 is set in PLU programming.
Group Links #2 and #3 are set in PLU Status Group programming.
This program allows you to set up the groups that PLU sales will report to. There are 99
groups. Here you can program the group descriptor that appears on reports, and you can
determine whether that group will add to the total of all groups that appears at the end of the
Group report.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  83
1. Select GROUP from
the P-MODE
PROGAMMING
MENU to view the
GROUP
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Select the group you
wish to program by
typing the group
number and pressing
ENTER, or by
pressing PAGE UP
or PAGE DN until
the appropriate group
displays.
GROUP #01 PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTOR :
DO NOT ADD TO GROUP TOTAL?
GROUP1
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Enter a descriptor of
up to 12 characters in
the descriptor field.
4. Select Y or N at the
"Do Not add to Group
Total?" field. Press
ENTER to set the
field and advance to
the next group.
5. Press ESC to return
to the P-MODE
PROGAMMING
MENU.
84  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Function Key
Function key options vary by key. Since function keys may exist on different levels of the
keyboard, or they may only be accessed through WLUs, they may be addressed for
programming by directly pressing the key, or by entering the function key code number.
In this chapter you will find:

A "Function Key Program Summary" on page 86 with a list of functions and their
codes.

A sample of program screens for each function key. (Sample screens for keys with
only descriptor programming and X-mode security are not shown.)
Note: Although each 12 character function key descriptor is set here, if a function key
appears on the financial or employee report, the descriptor that prints on the report
may be set separately. See “Report Descriptors” on page 163 to set descriptors for
function keys that appear on the financial or employee report. See “Report Printing
Options” on page 141 to determine which descriptors are used on reports.
1. Select FUNCTION
KEY from the PMode menu to
display the
FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAMMING
Screen.
2. Select a function to
program.
3. The programming
option screen for the
function will display.
FUNCTION KEY #
PROGRAMMING

PRESS THE KEY TO BE PROGRAMMED
OR

ENTER THE KEY NUMBER AN PRESS ENTER
OR

PRESS ENTER TO VIEW A FUNCTION LIST
OR

PRESS THE WLU WHERE THE FUNCTION IS
LOCATED AND SELECT THE APPROPRIATE
FUNCTION
ESC WLU ENTER FUNCTION KEY
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  85
Function Key Program Summary
Code# & Function
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
Programmability
NUMERIC 1
NUMERIC 2
NUMERIC 3
NUMERIC 4
NUMERIC 5
NUMERIC 6
NUMERIC 7
NUMERIC 7
NUMERIC 9
NUMERIC 0
NUMERIC 00
NUMERIC 000
ADD CHECK
BACK SPACE
BOLD
CANCEL
CAPS
CASH
TIP DECLARE
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 89
Descriptor
See program screen on page 89
See program screen on page 112
CHECK
CHECK CASH
CHECK ENDORSE
CLEAR
CONTINUE
CURR. CONV. 1
CURR. CONV. 2
CURR. CONV. 3
CURR. CONV. 4
CURR. CONV. 5
CURSOR DOWN ()
CURSOR LEFT ()
CURSOR RIGHT ()
CURSOR UP ()
DECIMAL (.)
DELETE
DONE
DRIVE THRU
EAT-IN
EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE 1
EMPLOYEE 2
EMPLOYEE 3
EMPLOYEE 4
EMPLOYEE 5
EMPLOYEE 6
EMPLOYEE 7
EMPLOYEE 8
See program screen on page 90
See program screen on page 91
See program screen on page 91
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 92
See program screen on page 92
See program screen on page 92
See program screen on page 92
See program screen on page 92
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 93
See program screen on page 93
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
86  P-Mode Programming
Code# & Function
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
Programmability
EMPLOYEE 9
EMPLOYEE 10
ENTER
ERR.CORR
FD STMP SHIFT
FD STMP SBTL
FD STMP TEND
GUEST #
HOLD
INACTIVE (CAN RE-USE)
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1
KEYBOARD LEVEL 2
KEYBOARD LEVEL 3
KEYBOARD LEVEL 4
KEYBOARD LEVEL 5
LIST CHECK 1
LIST CHECK 2
LIST CHECK 3
LIST CHECK 4
MACRO OFF
MACRO P
MACRO PAUSE
MACRO R
MAC5RO S
MACRO SET
MACRO VOID
MACRO X
MACRO Z
MACRO 1
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
MACRO 5
MACRO 6
MACRO 7
MACRO 8
MACRO 9
MACRO 10
MACRO 11
MACRO 12
MACRO 13
MACRO 14
MACRO 15
MACRO 16
MACRO 17
MACRO 18
MACRO 19
MACRO 20
MACRO 21
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 93
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Code# & Function
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
MACRO 22
MACRO 23
MACRO 24
MACRO 25
MACRO 26
MACRO 27
MACRO 28
MACRO 29
MACRO 30
MACRO 31
MACRO 32
MACRO 33
MACRO 34
MACRO 35
MACRO 36
MACRO 37
MACRO 38
MACRO 39
MACRO 40
MACRO #
MDSE RETURN
MISC TEND 1
MISC TEND 2
MISC TEND 3
MISC TEND 4
MISC TEND 5
MISC TEND 6
MISC TEND 7
MISC TEND 8
MISC TEND 9
MISC TEND 10
MISC TEND 11
MISC TEND 12
MISC TEND 13
MISC TEND 14
MISC TEND 15
MISC TEND 16
MISC TEND#
MODIFIER 1
MODIFIER 2
MODIFIER 3
MODIFIER 4
MODIFIER 5
MODIFIER 6
MODIFIER 7
MODIFIER 8
MODIFIER 9
MODIFIER 10
NEXT RECORD
#/NO SALE
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Programmability
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
See program screen on page 94
Descriptor
See program screen on page 97
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
See program screen on page 98
Descriptor
See program screen on page 99
See program screen on page 99
See program screen on page 99
See program screen on page 99
See program screen on page 99
See program screen on page 99
See program screen on page 99
See program screen on page 99
See program screen on page 99
See program screen on page 99
Descriptor
See program screen on page 100
Code# & Function
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
157.
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
170.
171.
172.
173.
174.
175.
176.
177.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
185.
186.
187.
188.
189.
190.
191.
192.
193.
194.
195.
196.
197.
P/BAL
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
PAID OUT 1
PAID OUT 2
PAID OUT 3
PAID OUT 4
PAID OUT 5
PAID RECALL
%1
%2
%3
%4
%5
%6
%7
%8
%9
% 10
PLU
PREV. RECORD
PRICE INQ
PRICE LVL1
PRICE LVL2
PRICE LVL3
PRICE LVL4
PRICE LVL5
PRICE LVL6
PRICE LVL7
PRICE LVL8
PRICE LVL9
PRICE LVL10
PRICE LVL11
PRICE LVL12
PRICE LVL13
PRICE LVL14
PRICE LVL15
PRICE LVL16
PRICE LVL17
PRICE LVL18
PRICE LVL19
PRICE LVL20
PRINT
PRINT CHECK
PRINT HOLD
PROMO
PRINT SCREEN
QUIT
RECEIPT ON/OFF
RECALL CHECK 1
Programmability
See program screen on page 101
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 101
See program screen on page 101
See program screen on page 101
See program screen on page 101
See program screen on page 101
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
See program screen on page 102
See program screen on page 102
See program screen on page 102
See program screen on page 102
See program screen on page 102
See program screen on page 102
See program screen on page 102
See program screen on page 102
See program screen on page 102
See program screen on page 102
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
See program screen on page 104
See program screen on page 105
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
See program screen on page 106
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 107
P-Mode Programming  87
Code# & Function
198.
199.
200.
201.
202.
203.
204.
205.
206.
207.
208.
209.
210.
211.
212.
213.
214.
215.
216.
217.
218.
219.
220.
221.
222.
223.
224.
225.
226.
227.
228.
229.
230.
231.
232.
233.
234.
235.
RECALL CHECK 2
RECALL CHECK 3
RECALL CHECK 4
RECD ACCT 1
RECD ACCT 2
RECD ACCT 3
RECD ACCT 4
RECD ACCT 5
RECEIPT
REPEAT
SCALE
SEAT #
SHIFT
SPLIT ITEM
SPLIT PAYMENT
STOCK INQ
STORE CHECK 1
STORE CHECK 2
STORE CHECK 3
STORE CHECK 4
SUBTOTAL
TABLE # 1
TABLE # 2
TABLE # 3
TABLE # 4
TAKE-OUT
TAX EXEMPT
TAX SHIFT 1
TAX SHIFT 2
TAX SHIFT 3
TAX SHIFT 4
TAX SHIFT 5
TAX SHIFT 6
TIME IN/OUT
TIP 1
TIP 2
TIP 3
TRANS CHK1
88  P-Mode Programming
Programmability
See program screen on page 107
See program screen on page 107
See program screen on page 107
See program screen on page 101
See program screen on page 101
See program screen on page 101
See program screen on page 101
See program screen on page 101
Descriptor
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
See program screen on page 108
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor
See program screen on page 109
See program screen on page 109
See program screen on page 109
See program screen on page 109
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 93
See program screen on page 110
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 111
See program screen on page 111
See program screen on page 111
See program screen on page 111
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Code# & Function
236.
237.
238.
239.
240.
241.
242.
243.
244.
245.
246.
247.
248.
249.
250.
251.
252.
253.
254.
255.
256.
257.
258.
259.
260.
261.
262.
263.
264.
265.
266.
267.
268.
269.
270.
TRANS CHK2
TRANS CHK3
TRANS CHK4
TRAY SUBTOTAL
VALIDATE
VOID ITEM
WASTE
WLU
X/TIME
YES/NO
PARK ORDER
SERVE ORDER
KP ROUTING
SPLIT CHECK
ALPHA TEXT
NOT FOUND PLU
NEXT DOLLAR
PRINT ALL
Programmability
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
See program screen on page 112
Descriptor
See program screen on page 113
See program screen on page 113
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
See program screen on page 114
Descriptor
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
Descriptor & X-Mode Control
See program screen on page 95
Descriptor
Descriptor
See program screen on page 100
Descriptor
Descriptor
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Cancel
FUNCTION KEY #016 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO (0:NO LIMIT)
KEY IS ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
VALIDATION IS COMPULSORY?
PRINT RECEIPT?
CANCEL
CANCEL
00000.00
N
N
Y
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Cash
FUNCTION KEY #018 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO (0=NO LIMIT)
CASH
CASH
00000.00
1 2 3 4 5 6
EXEMPT TAX :
N N N N N N
OPEN DRAWER?
Y
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
N
AMOUNT TENDER COMPULSORY?
N
DISABLE UNDER TENDERING?
N
ALLOW UNDER TENDERING IN X ONLY?
N
COIN CHANGER PORT# (0-7)
0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Cash Key Program Note
FIELD
Notes
COIN CHANGER PORT#
(0-7)
Enter the number of the serial port to which the coin
changer is attached.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  89
Check
FUNCTION KEY # 21 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO (0=NO LIMIT)
CHECK
CHECK
00000.00
1 2 3 4 5 6
EXEMPT TAX:
N N N N N N
OPEN DRAWER?
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
N
COMPULSORY CHECK ENDORSEMENT?
N
AMOUNT TENDER COMPULSORY?
N
DISABLE UNDER TENDERING?
N
ALLOW UNDER TENDERING IN X ONLY?
N
NON-ADD # ENTRY COMPULSORY?
N

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
FUNCTION KEY # 19 PROGRAMMING
HALO : Y=CHANGE N=TENDER
COIN CHANGER PORT # (0-7)

N
0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Check Key Program Note
FIELD
Notes
COIN CHANGER PORT#
(0-7)
Enter the number of the serial port to which the coin
changer is attached.
90  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Check Cash
FUNCTION KEY #022 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
CHECK CASH
DESCRIPTOR:
CHECK CASH
HALO (0=NO LIMIT)
00000.00
KEY IS ACTIVE IN X ONLY
N
ALLOW HALO OVERRIDE IN X ONLY
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Check Endorse
FUNCTION KEY #023 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
PRINTING PORT# (0-7)
CHK ENDORSE
CHK ENDORSE
0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  91
Currency Conversion 1-5
FUNCTION KEY #026 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
CONVERSION RATE:
CHANGE IN HOME CURRENCY
LINKED DRAWER # (0-3)
CURR.CONV1
CURR.CONV1
00.000000
Y
0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Currency Conversion Key Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
CONVERSION RATE
The value of foreign currency can be express in two
ways: foreign currency in US dollars, and the inverse,
US dollars in foreign currency. For example a
Canadian dollar may be worth $.70 US. The inverse of
that value statement would be that a US dollar is worth
$1.428571 Canadian dollars. Look for the rate
expressed as US dollars in foreign currency (i.e.
$1.428571 as in the example above) and enter that
value in this field. Note: this field can contain 8 digits,
with the decimal in any position. For example, you can
enter 4 digits, the decimal, and four fractional digits.
CHANGE IN HOME
CURRENCY
Select whether any change from an over-tender is
issued in home currency (Y) or foreign currency (N).
LINKED DRAWER #
(0-3)
Select the drawer to be opened on foreign currency
tender transactions.
92  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Drive Thru/Eat In/Take Out
Shown below is a sample screen showing the identical function options for all the functions
listed above:
FUNCTION KEY #038 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO (0=NO LIMIT)
DRIVE THRU
DRIVE THRU
00000.00
1 2 3 4 5 6
EXEMPT TAX:
N N N N N N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
N
KP PERIOD OVERRIDE (0=NO OVERRIDE)
0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Drive Thru/Eat In/Take Out Key Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
KP PERIOD OVERRIDE
Entry of a KP Period here allows kitchen printer routing
based upon destination (Eat-in/Take-out/Drive thru).
Selection of a KP Period here would also override KP
Time Period programs.
Error Correct
FUNCTION KEY #052 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO (0=NO LIMIT)
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
ERR.CORR.
ERR.CORR.
00000.00
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  93
Food Stamp Tend
FUNCTION KEY #055 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO (0=NO LIMIT)
FD/S TEND
FD/S TEND
00000.00
1 2 3 4 5 6
EXEMPT TAX :
N N N N N N
OPEN DRAWER?
Y
ALLOW DECIMAL ENTRY?
N
FOOD STAMP CHANGE Y=CASH N=FOOD STAMP N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Guest #
FUNCTION KEY #056 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
GUEST #
DESCRIPTOR:
GUEST #
COMPULSORY AFTER BEGINNING OF CHECK?
COMPULSORY FOR ALL SALES?
PRINT ON KP?
PRINT ON RECEIPT?
N
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
94  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
KP Routing
FUNCTION KEY #248 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
ROUTING PERIOD IS :
KP ROUTING
KP ROUTING
N
STAYDOWN 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
KP Routing Key Program Note
FIELD
Notes
ROUTING PERIOD IS
The KP ROUTING key is used to override KP Time
Period control. For example, a restaurant might
normally operate two kitchens at one time and one
kitchen at other times. In case the volume of business
changes, the manager might want to control the KP
routing manually. Also, a single item, or large order
might be required to be sent to a different printer than
normal. Select STAYDOWN, TRANS (transaction),
POP UP or ITEM POP up operation.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  95
Macro 1-40
Each Macro can execute up to 50 keystrokes.
1. Press keys to be
recorded in the macro
sequence.
2. Press the PAGE UP
or PAGE DN keys to
view the entire
macro, if necessary.
3. Press ESC to exit the
function key program
96  P-Mode Programming
MACRO KEY# 1 PROGRAMMING
#
-01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
KEY
----------------

ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN  FUNCTION KEY
PRESS [DONE] TO
VIEW A FUNCTION
LIST
PRESS
[CURSOR LEFT]
TO RESET A KEY
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Mdse Return
FUNCTION KEY #118 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
MDSE RETURN
DESCRIPTOR:
MDSE RETURN
HALO (0=NO LIMIT)
00000.00
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
N
ADD TO NET GRAND TOTAL?
N
SKIP ADJUSTMENT OF PLU TOTAL?
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  97
Misc Tend 1-16
FUNCTION KEY #119 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO (0=NO LIMIT)
MISC TEND1
MISC TEND1
00000.00
1 2 3 4 5 6
EXEMPT TAX:
N N N N N N
OPEN DRAWER?
Y
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
N
AMOUNT TENDER COMPULSORY?
N
DISABLE UNDER TENDERING?
N
ALLOW UNDER TENDERING IN X ONLY?
N
NON-ADD # ENTRY COMPULSORY?
N
ALLOW OVER TENDER?
N

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
FUNCTION KEY #119 PROGRAMMING
COIN CHANGER PORT# (0-7)
CONNECT EFT TERMINAL?
KEY IS

0
N
CREDIT
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Misc Tend Key Program Note
FIELD
Notes
COIN CHANGER PORT#
(0-7)
Enter the number of the serial port to which the coin
changer is attached.
CONNECT EFT TERMINAL
Set to Y for DataTran integrated payment.
KEY IS
Set to CREDIT, DEBIT or GIFT to indicate the
DataTran integrated payment function.
98  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Modifier 1-10
FUNCTION KEY #136 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
MODIFIER1
DESCRIPTOR:
MODIFIER1
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
N
MODIFY DESCRIPTOR ONLY(NOT PLU#)?
N
PRINT DESCRIPTOR ON GUEST CHECK?
Y
PRINT DESCRIPTOR ON RECEIPT?
Y
PRINT DESCRIPTOR ON KP?
Y
AFFECT DIGIT 1-14 OF PLU#
00
VALUE OF AFFECTED DIGIT (0-9) OF PLU
0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Modifier Key Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
AFFECT DIGIT 1-14 OF
PLU#
Preceding a PLU with a Size and/or Modifier key
manipulates the PLU code assigned to the PLU key,
causing a different PLU to be registered when the PLU
key is pressed. Enter the digit of the PLU number you
wish to be changed when using this key. (Digit #1 is
the rightmost digit; digit #14 is the leftmost digit.)
VALUE OF DIGIT ADDED
(0-9) TO PLU
Enter the value you wish to be added in the digit
position selected. For example, if you wish to affect
PLU digit #4 with a value of 1, then pressing this
modifier key prior to the registration of PLU #17 will
result in the registration of PLU #1017.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  99
Not Found PLU
FUNCTION KEY #251 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
NOTFOUND PLU
NO SALE DESCRIPTOR:
NOTFOUND PLU
SKIP IN NOT FOUND PLU REGISTRATION:
GROUP LINK #1
N
DESCRIPTION
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
100  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
#/No Sale
FUNCTION KEY #147 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
#/NOSALE
NO SALE DESCRIPTOR:
#/NOSALE
HALO DIGITS FOR NON-ADD ENTRY (0-14)
ALLOW NOSALE FUNCTION?
ALLOW NON-ADD FUNCTION?
NO SALE IN X ONLY?
NO SALE INACTIVE AFTER NON-ADD ENTRY?
VALIDATION COMPULSORY ON NOSALE?
ENFORCE NON-ADD AT BEGINNING OF SALE?
COMP. NON-ADD# MUST MATCH HALO DIGIT#?
NOSALE : PRINT ON RECEIPT?
0
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P/Bal
FUNCTION KEY #148 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
P/BAL
DESCRIPTOR:
P/BAL
MUST BE ENTERED AT START OF SALE?
COMPULSORY P/BAL
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  101
Paid Out 1-5/Recd Acct 1-5
Shown below is a sample screen showing the identical function options for all the functions
listed above:
FUNCTION KEY #151 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO (0:NO LIMIT)
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
PAID OUT1
PAID OUT1
00000.00
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
102  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
%1 - %10
FUNCTION KEY #157 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO/RATE
%1
%1
00.000
1 2 3 4 5 6
TAXABLE :
N N N N N N
FUNCTION IS INACTIVE
N
FUNCTION IS ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
N
FUNCTION : Y=SALE, N=ITEM
N
FUNCTION : Y=AMOUNT, N=PERCENT
N
FUNCTION : Y=PLUS, N=MINUS
N
FUNCTION : Y=PRESET, N=OPEN
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
N

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
FUNCTION KEY #157 PROGRAMMING
ALLOW PRESET OVERRIDE?
PRESET OVERRIDE IN X ONLY?
FUNCTION NETS ITEM TOTAL?
FUNCTION IS FOOD STAMP ELIGIBLE?
ALLOW MULTIPLE SALE COUPONS W/O SBTL?
ALLOW ONLY ONE DISCOUNT PER TRANS?
KEY IS "DO IT" DISCOUNT FUNCTION?

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
% Key Program Note
FIELD
Notes
KEY IS "DO IT"
DISCOUNT FUNCTION?
If a tender is short of the amount due, the operator has
the option of accepting the amount tendered thus far as
total payment for the transaction. Press the % key
programmed with the "do it" function to finalize the
sale with an amount still due. The amount due that is
forgiven will be added to this key's total.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  103
Price Inquiry/Stock Inquiry
FUNCTION KEY #169 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
PRICE INQ
DESCRIPTOR:
PRICE INQ
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
FUNCTION IS : Y=STAY DOWN/N=POP UP
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Price Inquiry Program Note
FIELD
Notes
Y=Stay Down/N=Pop Up
If a Stay Down, when a second PLU is registered after a
stock or price inquiry, the result will be an inquiry on
the second item. If Pop Up, when a second PLU is
registered after a stock or price inquiry, the result will
be the registration of the item rather than an inquiry for
the item.
104  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Print
FUNCTION KEY #190 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
OUTPUT PRINTER # (0-40)
PRINT
PRINT
00
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Print Check
FUNCTION KEY #191 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
PRINT CHECK
DESCRIPTOR:
PRINT CHECK
PRINT CHECK AUTOMATICALLY SERVICE CHK? N
PRINT CONSEC# ON GUEST CHECK?
Y
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  105
Promo
FUNCTION KEY #193 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
EXEMPT TAX:
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
PROMO
PROMO
1 2 3 4 5 6
Y Y Y Y Y Y
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
106  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Recall Check 1-4
FUNCTION KEY #197 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
RECALL CHK1
DESCRIPTOR:
RECALL CHK1
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
N
ENFORCE SEAT#
N
TABLE ENTRY REQUIRED
N
MULTIPLE CHECKS ALLOWED FOR EACH TABLE Y
GUEST COUNT ENTRY REQUIRED
N
COMPULSORY FOR ALL SALES?
N
ASSIGNED BY REGISTER?
N
OPENING EMPLOYEE HAS EXCLUSIVE ACCESS Y
PRINT CHECK ON RECEIPT?
N
PRINT CHECK ON JOURNAL?
N

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
FUNCTION KEY #197 PROGRAMMING
PRINT CHECK ON KP?
DRIVE THRU FEATURE ENABLED?
PRINT RECEIPT AFTER STORE CHECK?
LENGTH OF CHECK# IN DIGITS (0-10)
SCAN CHECK#?

N
N
N
00
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Recall Check Key Program Note
FIELD
Notes
DRIVE THRU FEATURE
ENABLED?
Set to Y if the tracking file is used for drive thru
windows in fast food operations. In this case, the recall
key will automatically recall the lowest tracking
number from the appropriate tracking file. Note: see
“Store Check 1-4” on page 109. You must also set the
appropriate Store Check key with the drive thru option
enabled.
SCAN CHECK#
Allows use of scanner to enter check number.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  107
Scale
Select "SET TARE
WEIGHTS" and press
ENTER to access the
TARE WEIGHT
PROGRAMMING
screen.
FUNCTION KEY #208 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
SCALE
DESCRIPTOR:
SCALE
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
ALLOW MANUAL ENTRY OF WEIGHT?
INHIBIT TARE WEIGHT ENTRY?
TARE ENTRY IN X ONLY?
TARE ENTRY IS COMPULSORY?
WEIGHT SYMBOL : Y=kg, N=lb
N
N
N
N
N
N
SET TARE WEIGHTS 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
TARE WEIGHT PROGRAMMING
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
00.000
00.O00
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
00.000
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
108  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Store Check 1-4
FUNCTION KEY #214 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC :
DESCRIPTOR :
HALO (0:NO LIMIT)
STORE CHK1
STORE CHK1
00000.00
1 2 3 4 5 6
EXEMPT TAX:
Y Y Y Y Y Y
ALLOW IN X ONLY?
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
N
NON-ADD# COMPULSORY?
N
PRINT ON RECEIPT?
N
PRINT ON JOURNAL?
N
SERVICE OF NEGATIVE BALANCE IN X ONLY? N
HARD CHECK PRINTER# (0-40)
00

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
FUNCTION KEY #214 PROGRAMMING
ENABLE DRIVE THROUGH OPTION

N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Store Check Key Program Note
FIELD
Notes
ENABLE DRIVE
THROUGH OPTION
Set to Y if the tracking file is used for fast food
operations. In this case, the store key will
automatically assign the next tracking number from the
appropriate tracking file and store the transaction.
Note: see “Recall Check 1-4” on page 107. You must
also set the appropriate Recall Check key with the drive
thru option enabled.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  109
Tax Exempt
FUNCTION KEY #234 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
HALO (0:NO LIMIT)
EXEMPT TAX :
NON-ADD# COMPULSORY?
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
TAX EXEMPT
TAX EXEMPT
00000.00
1 2 3 4 5 6
Y Y Y Y Y Y
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
110  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Time In/Out
FUNCTION KEY #231 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
TIME IN/OUT
TIME IN/OUT
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Tip 1-3
FUNCTION KEY #232 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
TIP1
DESCRIPTOR:
TIP1
HALO (0:NO LIMIT)
00000.00
TIP IS: Y=PERCENTAGE N=AMOUNT
N
1 2 3 4 5 6
TIP IS TAXABLE BY RATE :
Y Y Y Y Y Y
MUST BE PAID BY MISC TEND AFTER TIP?
N
TIP AMOUNT ADDS TO NET & GROSS TOTALS? N
CHARGE TIP IS DEDUCTED FROM CASH?
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  111
Tip Declare
FUNCTION KEY #019 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
KEY IS ACTIVE IN X ONLY
VALIDATION IS COMPULSORY
TIP DECLARE
TIP DECLARE
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Tray Subtotal
FUNCTION KEY #239 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC :
DESCRIPTOR :
TRAY
TRAY
1 2
N N
SUBTL
SUBTL
3 4 5 6
EXEMPT TAX :
N N N N
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
N
COMPULSORY BEFORE TENDER?
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
N
ADVANCES CONSEC# AT FINAL TENDER ONLY? N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
112  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Void Item
FUNCTION KEY #241 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC :
DESCRIPTOR :
HALO (0:NO LIMIT)
ACTIVE IN X ONLY?
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
VOID ITEM
VOID ITEM
00000.00
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Waste
FUNCTION KEY #242 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR:
ALLOW IN X ONLY?
COMPULSORY VALIDATION?
AFFECT ON PROJECTIONS?
WASTE
WASTE
N
N
Y
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Waste Key Program Note
FIELD
Notes
AFFECT ON
PROJECTIONS?
If Y, the projection report will consider actual sale plus
waste. If N, the projection report will only consider
sales.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  113
X/Time
FUNCTION KEY #244 PROGRAMMING
DEFAULT DESC:
DESCRIPTOR :
ALLOW SPLIT PRICING
X/TIME
X/TIME
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
114  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
System Options
Options are sorted by category to assist the programmer in finding a specific option. Within
each category, options are also referenced by number for easy retrieval.
1. Select SYSTEM
OPTION from the PMode menu to
display the System
Option Programming
Screen.
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and press
ENTER.
SYSTEM OPTION PROGRAMMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SYSTEM OPTION PROGRAMMING
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

SPS 1000 Program Manual
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS
TAX OPTIONS
CASH DRAWER OPTIONS
TRAINING MODE OPTIONS
LEVEL/MODIFIER OPTIONS
TRACKING FILE OPTIONS
KITCHEN PRINTING/VIDEO OPTIONS
VALIDATION/SUBTOTAL PRT OPTIONS
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS
REPORT PRINTING OPTIONS
REPORT OPTIONS
TIME KEEPING OPTIONS
TAX OPTIONS
CASH DRAWER OPTIONS
TRAINING MODE OPTIONS
LEVEL/MODIFIER OPTIONS
TRACKING FILE OPTIONS
KITCHEN PRINTING/VIDEO OPTIONS
VALIDATION/SUBTOTAL PRT OPTIONS
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS
REPORT PRINTING OPTIONS
REPORT OPTIONS
TIME KEEPING OPTIONS
E.J. & DETAIL PRINTING OPTIONS
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  115
General Function Options
1. Select GENERAL
FUNCTION
OPTIONS from the
SYSTEM OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The first page
of general options
displays with the first
option field selected.
2. Press the    
keys to select a field
to edit:
3. Type a new value and
press ENTER or  to
accept the entry and
advance to the next
field.
4. From the last field on
the screen press  to
view the next page of
options, or from any
point on the screen
press PAGE DN to
view the next page of
options.
5. Press PAGE UP to
return to the previous
screen.
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS
1.
6.
MANAGER CONTROL (IN X-MODE):
NEGATIVE SALES
N
NEGATIVE TENDER
N
ZERO SALES
N
ENFORCE EAT-IN/TAKE-OUT/DRIVE THRU:
AT BEGIN OF SALE
N
BEFORE TENDER
N
DEFAULT DESTINATION
NONE 
ROUNDING ON % & TAX:
UP AT .5 
ROUNDING ON SPLIT PRICE/DECIMAL MULT
UP AT .5 
CONSOLIDATE LIKE ITEMS
Y

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
2.
3.
4.
5.
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS
7. HASH OPTIONS:
UPDATES SALE(RECEIPT) TOTAL
ADDS TO GROSS SALE TOTAL
ADDS NET SALE TTL
UPDATES FINANCIAL/SHIFT REPORTS
UPDATES TIME PERIOD REPORT
UPDATES EMPLOYEE REPORT
UPDATES GROUP REPORT
UPDATES INDIVIDUAL PLU TOTALS
ADDS TO OVERALL PLU TOTALS
UPDATES DRAWER TOTALS REPORT
UPDATES DAILY SALES REPORT
ADJUST INVENTORY

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

116  P-Mode Programming
ACTIVATE ROUNDING ON CASH
ACTIVATE ROUNDING ON SUBTOTAL
ROUNDING SYSTEM 
GLOBAL ENTRY LIMIT (0-7 0=NO LMT)
DIRECT MULTIPLICATION:
ENABLE
NUMBER OF DIGIT (1-5)
ALLOW PLU PRESET/HALO OVERRIDE
SILENT KEY DEPRESSION
Y=ALPHA CODE ENTRY/N=A/N OVERLAY
ALLOW OPEN ENTRY FOR SCALE PLUS
DEACTIVATE VOID MODE
N
N
0
N
1
N
N
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
6. Press PAGE DN to
view the next page of
the GENERAL
FUNCTION
OPTIONS. Note that
the scroll indicators
tell you when more
information is located
on pages above or
below the current
page.
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS
18.
19.
20
21
22
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.

7. Press PAGE DN to
view the next of the
GENERAL
FUNCTION
OPTIONS. Note that
the scroll indicators
tell you when more
information is located
on pages above or
below the current
page.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE7" KEY 00
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE8" KEY 00
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE9" KEY 00
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE10" KEY 00
AUTO CLEAR ERROR CONDITION
Y
GUEST CHECK BALANCE HALO
(0=NO LIMIT)
0000000.00
SET DEFAULT SEAT # TO 1
N
CONTINUE MACRO WHEN MACRO IS LOOP N
ENTER TIME FOR TRANSACTION VOID
Y
START CURSOR AT PRICE1 IN PLU PGM Y
SCREEN SAVER (MINUTES)
00
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.

SPS 1000 Program Manual
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTIONS

8. Press PAGE DN to
view the last of the
GENERAL
FUNCTION
OPTIONS. Note that
the scroll indicators
tell you when more
information is located
on pages above or
below the current
page.
DISABLE TIME/DATE PROGRAMMING
N
ALLOW PLU COPY BY RANGE
N
ALLOW POST TENDERING
N
EMPLOYEE: Y=POP UP/N=STAY DOWN
N
EMPLOYEE SIGN ON
PUSH BUTTON 
QTY LIMIT FOR X/TIME KEY
999.999
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE1" KEY 01
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE2" KEY 00
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE3" KEY 00
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE4" KEY 00
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE5" KEY 00
EMPLOYEE # LINKED "EMPOYEE6" KEY 00
ALLOW MENU SELECTION WITHOUT ENTER
RECEIPT STATUS ON OPERATOR DISPLAY
CARD READER ENABLE
ALLOW SALES FOR 0 STOCK ITEMS
DATE OF BIRTH ENTRY COMPULSORY
INPUT CHECK DIGIT OF NONPLU CODE
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  117
General Function Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
MANAGER CONTROL (IN XMODE):
NEGATIVE SALES
NEGATIVE TENDER
ZERO SALES
Determine which of the listed functions
require the key lock to be placed in the X
position. Settings here do not affect
transactions performed in the VOID key lock
mode.
2
ENFORCE EAT-IN/TAKEOUT/DRIVE THRU:
AT BEGIN OF SALE
BEFORE TENDER
You can enforce EAT-IN, TAKE-OUT, or
DRIVE THRU either at the beginning of a
sale, or before a tender by selecting Y for
either option.
3
DEFAULT DESTINATION
You have the option of selecting a default
destination selection: NONE, EAT-IN,
TAKE-OUT, or DRIVE-THRU.
4
5
ROUNDING ON % & TAX
ROUNDING ON SPLIT
PRICE/DECIMAL MULT
When calculations result in a fraction of a
cent, you have the option of rounding UP AT
.5 ($0.005 or greater rounds up; less than
0.005 rounds down) or you can choose to
round any fractional calculation ALWAYS
UP or ALWAYS DOWN.
6
CONSOLIDATE LIKE ITEMS
If Y, like items are added, i.e. "2 COKES". If
N, like items are on separate lines, i.e. "1
COKE" and "1 COKE".
7
HASH OPTIONS
Here you can define the meaning of HASH by
selecting Y or N to each item in the list of
calculation options. See option #9 in “PLU
Status Group” on page 39 to apply HASH
status to PLUs assigned to a particular status
group.
8
ACTIVATE ROUNDING ON
CASH
ACTIVATE ROUNDING ON
SUBTOTAL
ROUNDING SYSTEM
Use this option to eliminate the use of small
value coins (i.e. pennies). Rounding up or
down occurs at subtotal or cash.
9
10
Select the ROUNDING SYSTEM field and
press ENTER to display the ROUNDING
SYSTEM PROGRAMMING SCREEN where
up to five ranges can be set. For example if
you wish to eliminate pennies, the ranges
could be set as:
#1 00-02 000 (.00-.02 rounds to .00)
#2 03-07 005 (.03-.07 rounds to .05)
#3 08-09 010 (.08-.09 rounds up to .10)
118  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
#
FIELD
Notes
11
GLOBAL ENTRY LIMIT
(0-7 0=NO LMT)
Select an entry limit that applies to all
numeric entries (i.e. amounts for PLU entry,
tenders, or multiplication.) The global entry
limit will override any individually
programmed limits.
12
DIRECT MULTIPLICATION:
ENABLE
NUMBER OF DIGIT (1-5)
Direct multiplication allows you to enter a
quantity, then press a preset key without using
the X/TIME key. You can enable direct
multiplication here, and also determine the
maximum number of digits for the multiplier.
13
ALLOW PLU PRESET/HALO
OVERRIDE
Override of a preset (entry of a price into a
preset key) or override of a HALO (entry of a
price greater than the PLUs high amount limit
can be allowed. Note: In order to override,
you must also set the flag for each individual
PLU to allow override, and you must operate
an employee with the authority level #18 set
to allow override.
14
SILENT KEY DEPRESSION
If Y, both the key depression tone and the
error tone are silenced. (Error messages
continue to display.)
15
Y=ALPHA CODE
ENTRY/N=A/N OVERLAY
Select the method you wish to use when
programming alpha characters in descriptor
fields.
16
ALLOW OPEN ENTRY FOR
SCALE PLUS
If Y, amount entries are allowed for open
scale PLUs.
17
DEACTIVATE VOID MODE
Set to Y to deactivate any activity in the
VOID key lock position.
18
DISABLE TIME/DATE
PROGRAMMING
Set to Y to remove the ability to change or
reprogram the current date/time.
19
ALLOW PLU COPY BY
RANGE
If yes, the COPY PLU and COPY PLU
STATUS GROUP commands allow you to
copy statuses from a single PLU or GROUP
to a range of PLUs or GROUPS. If no, you
can only copy from a single PLU or STATUS
GROUP to another individual PLU or
GROUP. See “Copy Program” on page 229.
20
ALLOW POST TENDERING
Choose Y to allow tendering after the sale has
been finalized, for the purpose of computing
change
21
EMPLOYEE:
Y=POP UP/N=STAY DOWN
Choose Y to automatically sign off at the
completion of a transaction. Choose N to
register sales continuously for the same
employee.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  119
#
FIELD
Notes
22
EMPLOYEE SIGN ON
Select the method you wish to use when
signing on to operate the SPS 1000: PUSH
BUTTON, SECRET CODE, EMPLOYEE#
or MCR. See “Employee Sign-On/Sign-Off”
in the SPS 1000 Operation Manual for more
information.
23
QTY LIMIT FOR X/TIME KEY
Determine the maximum quantity that can be
used for a multiplier.
2433
EMPLOYEE # LINKED
"EMPOYEE1" KEY
The 10 push button employee functions
(codes 41-50) can be used to sign on specific
employees. The specific employee for each
key is assigned here.
34
AUTO CLEAR ERROR
CONDITION
If Y, error conditions will clear automatically
after a momentary error tone and display of
an error message. You can continue with the
correct sequence without first pressing the
CLEAR key. If No, you must press CLEAR
to clear any error before continuing.
35
GUEST CHECK BALANCE
HALO (0=NO LIMIT)
You can place a high amount limit on the
balance that is stored in a tracking file. If
36
SET DEFAULT SEAT # TO 1
If yes, each item that does not receive a seat #
will be assigned the default seat number of 1.
Using a seat number system assists prep staff
in assembling orders correctly and facilitates
payment of separate parts of a check.
37
CONTINUE MACRO WHEN
MACRO IS LOOP
If Y, continuous macros can be created by
including a macro in a macro sequence. A
continuous macro might be used to run a test
sequence.
38
ENTER TIME FOR
TRANSACTION VOID
If yes, you must enter a time before beginning
a transaction void. This allows sales by time
reports to be adjusted appropriately.
39
START CURSOR AT PRICE1
IN PLU PGM
To facilitate price changes on an existing
program, you can choose Y to automatically
place the cursor in the first price field when a
PLU Program screen is opened. In the default
condition (N) the cursor is placed at the PLU#
field.
40
SCREEN SAVER (MINUTES)
Enter the number of minutes before an
inactive screen will automatically blank.
Press any key to refresh the screen.
120  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
#
FIELD
Notes
41
ALLOW MENU SELECTION
WITHOUT ENTER
You can select an item from a menu (or from
a WLU that does not allow functions) by
entering only the item number, rather than the
item number then ENTER. Note: If there are
more than 9 selections on the menu, you must
enter single digit selections with a preceding
0, i.e. enter 01 to select item #1.
42
RECEIPT STATUS ON
OPERATOR DISPLAY
Choose Y to display the receipt on/off status
on the operator display. Receipt on displays
as "Ron"; receipt off displays as "Rof".
43
CARD READER ENABLE
Choose Y to enable optional magnetic stripe
reader.
44
ALLOW SALES FOR 0
STOCK ITEMS
If Y, sale of items with zero stock is allowed.
45
DATE OF BIRTH ENTRY
COMPULSORY
If Y, date of birth for age verification items
must be entered at prompt. Operator may
press escape to sell items when set to N.
46
INPUT CHECK DIGIT OF
NONPLU CODE
If price embedded barcodes are used, choose
Y to force input of check digit.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  121
Tax Options
1. Select TAX
OPTIONS from the
SYSTEM OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The tax
options display with
the first option field
selected. (There is
only one page of tax
options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
122  P-Mode Programming
TAX OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
TAX ROUNDING FACTOR:
UP AT .5
VAT SUBTRACTED FM INDIV PLU TTLS
N
TAX EXEMPT QTY (CANADA DONUT)
00
PRINT TAXABLE AMOUNTS ON R/J
N
TAXABLE STATUS INDICATORS:
DISPLAY
Y
PRINT
Y
6. PRINT TAX AMOUNTS AT TENDER
Y
7. PRINT VAT TAX AMOUNTS SEPARATELY
N
8. TAX PRINT: Y=COMBINED/N=ITEMIZED
N
9. PRINT TAX EXEMPT DESCRIPTOR/TTLS
N
10. PRINT SUBTOTAL WITHOUT TAX
N
11. DO NOT SHOW FOOD STAMP INDICATOR
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Tax Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
TAX ROUNDING FACTOR
When tax calculations result in a fraction of a
cent, you have the option of rounding UP AT
.5 ($0.005 or greater rounds up; less than
0.005 rounds down) or you can choose to
round any fractional calculation ALWAYS
UP or ALWAYS DOWN.
2
VAT SUBTRACTED FROM
INDIV PLU TTLS
Choose Y to subtract the VAT tax amount
from the PLU totals on the PLU report. If N,
the PLU report total reflects the items price
and the value added tax.
3
TAX EXEMPT QTY (CANADA
DONUT)
Enter the quantity at which you wish tax to be
exempted. For example if set at 12,
registration of PLUs reported to status groups
with eligibility for Canadian donut law
selected will charge tax until the quantity with
the transaction reaches 12. When 12 or more
are registered, all will be sold without tax.
See “PLU Status Group” on page 39 for more
information.
4
PRINT TAXABLE AMOUNTS
ON R/J
Choose Y to print the tax eligible subtotals for
each tax on the receipt and/or journal, if
printed.
5
TAXABLE STATUS
INDICATORS:
DISPLAY
PRINT
In the default condition (Y), tax eligibility
indicators, i.e. TX1 display on the screen and
print on printers adjacent to the item. Choose
N to selectively remove the indicators from
the display and/or print.
6
PRINT TAX AMOUNTS AT
TENDER
When set to N, the tax charged will not print
on the receipt (TAX1, TAX2, etc.)
7
PRINT VAT TAX AMOUNTS
SEPARATELY
If there are multiple value added taxes,
choose Y to print tax amounts separately for
each tax, rather than a single tax total.
8
TAX PRINT:
Y=COMBINED/N=ITEMIZED
If N, each tax amount will print separately. If
Y, one TAX total will print.
9
PRINT TAX EXEMPT
DESCRIPTOR/TTLS
If Y, a tax-exempt total will print on the
receipt.
10
PRINT SUBTOTAL WITHOUT
TAX
If Y, the merchandise subtotal does not
include tax.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  123
#
FIELD
Notes
11
DO NOT SHOW FOOD
STAMP INDICATOR
In the default condition (Y), the food stamp
indicator, FS displays on the screen and prints
on printers adjacent to the item. Choose N to
remove the indicator from the display and
print.
124  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Cash Drawer Options
1. Select CASH
DRAWER OPTIONS
from the SYSTEM
OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The cash
drawer options
display with the first
option field selected.
(There is only one
page of cash drawer
options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
CASH DRAWER OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ALLOW SALES WITH DRAWER OPEN
N
C-I-D AMOUNT LIMIT
00000.00
OPEN DRAWER DURING X-REPORTS
N
OPEN DRAWER DURING Z-REPORTS
N
ACTIVATE OPEN DRAWER ALARM
N
OPEN DRAWER ALARM TIME
030
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  125
Cash Drawer Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
ALLOW SALES WITH
DRAWER OPEN
Choose Y to force the drawer to be closed
before registrations are allowed.
2
C-I-D AMOUNT LIMIT
Set the maximum amount of cash in drawer
before a error tone and message display. The
error can be cleared and continued sales are
allowed, however the warning continues to
sound at the completion of each transaction,
until cash is removed from the drawer. Set
the amount to 0 to disable the cash in drawer
limit warning.
3
OPEN DRAWER DURING XREPORTS
Choose Y to open the drawer at the
completion of any X report.
4
OPEN DRAWER DURING ZREPORTS
Choose Y to open the drawer at the
completion of any Z report.
5
ACTIVATE OPEN DRAWER
ALARM
If Y, an error tone sounds when the cash
drawer remains open the length of time
specified in option #6 below.
6
OPEN DRAWER ALARM
TIME
Enter length of time the drawer may be open
(in seconds) before the open drawer alarm
sounds.
126  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Training Mode Options
1. Select TRAINING
MODE OPTIONS
from the SYSTEM
OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The training
mode options display
with the first option
field selected. (There
is only one page of
training mode
options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
TRAINING MODE OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
TRAINING MODE PASSWORD
0000
OPEN DRAWER IN TRAINING MODE
N
TRAINING EMPLOYEE FILE #
00
ALLOW REAR DISPLAY IN TRAINING
N
SEND ORDERS TO KP/KV IN TRAINING
N
PRINT JOURNALS IN TRAINING
N
PRINT RECEIPTS IN TRAINING
N
DO NOT PRINT "TRAINING"
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  127
Training Mode Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
TRAINING MODE
PASSWORD
Enter a 4 digit numeric password that must be
used to access the TRAINING option on the
X-MODE MANAGER MENU. If the
password is 0, password entry is not required.
2
OPEN DRAWER IN TRAINING
MODE
Choose Y to open the appropriate cash drawer
during training operations.
3
TRAINING EMPLOYEE FILE #
Choose the employee file # that is updated
with training activity.
4
ALLOW REAR DISPLAY IN
TRAINING
Choose Y to activate the rear display during
training activity. If N, the rear display
indicates CLOSED during training.
5
SEND ORDERS TO KP/KV IN
TRAINING
Choose Y to send orders to the appropriate
kitchen printer and/or kitchen video during
training.
6
PRINT JOURNALS IN
TRAINING
Choose Y to print (or update, in the case of an
electronic journal) the journal in training.
7
PRINT RECEIPTS IN
TRAINING
Choose Y to print receipts (if receipts are
normally printed) during training.
8
DO NOT PRINT "TRAINING"
If receipts are printed they are normally
printed with the message TRAINING and the
message '***TRAINING***" displays on the
operator screen. Choose Y to remove these
messages.
128  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Level/Modifier Options
1. Select
LEVEL/MODIFIER
OPTIONS from the
SYSTEM OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The
level/modifier options
display with the first
option field selected.
(There is only one
page of level/modifier
options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
LEVEL/MODIFIER OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
DEFAULT KEYBOARD LEVEL
1
KEYBOARD LVL:
STAYDOWN 
DEFAULT PRICE LEVEL
00
PRICE LEVEL:
STAYDOWN 
PLU MOD KEYS:
STAYDOWN 
APPLY MODIFIER TO CODE ENTRY PLUS N
MODIFER OVERWRITES PREV MODIFER
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  129
Level/Modifier Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
DEFAULT KEYBOARD
LEVEL
If keyboard levels are pop-up (see option #2),
enter the level you wish to return to after an
entry in a different level.
3
DEFAULT PRICE LEVEL
If price levels are pop-up (see option #4),
enter the level you wish to return to after an
entry in a different level.
2
4
5
KEYBOARD LEVEL:
PRICE LEVEL:
PLU MOD KEYS:
Select the field and press ENTER. Choose
STAY DOWN, TRANS POP UP, or ITEM
POP UP.
STAY DOWN: Once chosen, will remain
active until the next choice.
ITEM POP UP: Choice remains active for
the next PLU only, then returns to the default.
TRANS POP UP: Choice remains active for
the remainder of the transaction, then returns
to the default with the transaction is finalized.
6
APPLY MODIFIER TO CODE
ENTRY PLUS
If Y, PLU modifier keys may be used with
both keyboard PLU keys and code entry
PLUs.
7
MODIFER OVERWRITES
PREV MODIFER
If Y, only the last modifier entry will affect
the PLU number. Use this setting when a
PLU is modified only once, i.e.
small/med/large. If N, several modifiers
affecting different digit positions could be
entered and then affect the PLU registered.
For example, size, crust type, and/or toppings
could be indicated on pizza items.
130  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Tracking File Options
1. Select TRACKING
FILE OPTIONS from
the SYSTEM
OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The tracking
file options display
with the first option
field selected. (There
are two pages of
tracking file options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
TRACKING FILE OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER CHECK
N
TRANSFER TOTALS WITH CHECK
Y
CHECKS PAID SLIP IS STUB
N
PRINT GUEST CHECK
N
SELECT HELD ITEMS ON RECALL
Y
WARN IF HELD ITEMS AT FINALIZE
Y
STARTING CHECK #:
CHECK #1
0000000001
CHECK #2
0000000001
CHECK #3
0000000001
CHECK #4
0000000001

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
TRACKING FILE OPTIONS
8.
9
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

SPS 1000 Program Manual
CHECK# LIMIT (0=NO LIMIT):
CHECK #1
0000000000
CHECK #2
0000000000
CHECK #3
0000000000
CHECK #4
0000000000
TRACK 2 HOLDS CLOSED CHKS FM TRK 1 N
TRACK 4 HOLDS CLOSED CHKS FM TRK 3 N
RESET CHECK #1 AT:
Z1 FINANCIAL 
RESET CHECK #2 AT:
Z1 FINANCIAL 
RESET CHECK #3 AT:
Z1 FINANCIAL 
RESET CHECK #4 AT:
Z1 FINANCIAL 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  131
Tracking File Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER
CHECK
If Y, the check will be assigned to the last
person who posted to the check.
2
TRANSFER TOTALS WITH
CHECK
If Y, all sales on the check will be credited to
the last person who posted on the check. If N,
if multiple employees post items to the check,
each employee will be credited with the items
they posted.
3
CHECKS PAID SLIP IS STUB
If Y, the PRINT CHECK function produces a
guest check with totals only, without item
detail.
4
PRINT GUEST CHECK
When Y, the PRINT CHECK is active and
guest check will print.
5
SELECT HELD ITEMS ON
RECALL
Items may be "held" to temporarily postpone
kitchen printing (or display). If Y, held items
are automatically selected when a check is
recalled so they may be sent to the
appropriate printers/screens.
6
WARN IF HELD ITEMS AT
FINALIZE
If a check with held items is paid, a warning
will display.
7
STARTING CHECK #
For each tracking file that you are using, if
you are automatically assigning tracking
numbers, you can enter the first number of the
tracking file to be issued after the check
number is reset.
8
CHECK NUMBER LIMIT
Sets the upper limit for the check #. If set
to"10", once check #10 is used, the next
check will be the starting check number.
9
10
TRACK 2 HOLDS CLOSED
CHKS FM TRK 1
TRACK 4 HOLDS CLOSED
CHKS FM TRK 3
The SPS 1000 system does not feature a
standard closed check file. However, if you
do not require all four of the available check
files, unused tracking files can be utilized to
store closed checks as indicated in options #9
& #10. (See "Memory Allocation " in SMode Programming.)
11
12
13
14
RESET CHECK #1 AT:
RESET CHECK #2 AT:
RESET CHECK #3 AT:
RESET CHECK #4 AT:
Select when you wish the check number to
reset: Z1 FINANCIAL, Z1 OPEN CHECK
or NEVER.
132  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Kitchen Printing/Video Options
1. Select KITCHEN
PRINTING/VIDEO
OPTIONS from the
SYSTEM OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The kitchen
printing/video options
display with the first
option field selected.
(There are three pages
of kitchen
printing/video
options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
KITCHEN PRINTING/VIDEO OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.

PRINT AT KP:
TOTAL AMOUNT LINE
PRINT SEAT #
ORDER #
TRANSACTION VOID ITEMS
PLU CODE
PLU PRICE
BITMAP
NUMBER OF ITEMS
LOGO MESSAGE
SORT KP BY KITCHEN PRINT GROUP #
# LINE FEED AT BEGIN OF KP PRINT
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
00
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
KITCHEN PRINTING/VIDEO OPTIONS
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12
13.
14.

# LINE FEED AT END OF KP PRINT
00
SEND ORDER TO KP:
AT SUBTOTAL
N
COMBINE LIKE ITEMS ON KP OR KVS
Y
SEND ORDER TO KVS ON SUBTOTAL
N
PRINT VOIDED ORDERS AT KP OR KVS
N
KP IS: Y=REAL TIME/N=BATCH
N
KVS IS: Y=REAL TIME/N=BATCH
N
USE KP ROUTER:THE SAME FOR ALL REG 
KP ORDER# COMBINTION OF REG#&CONS# 
DISPLAY KP TIME PERIOD#
N
DISPLAY KP ORDER#
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
KITCHEN PRINTING/VIDEO OPTIONS
15. SEPARATE KP BY KP GROUP#
16. SEPARATE KP BY KP ITEM

SPS 1000 Program Manual
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  133
Kitchen Printing/Video Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
PRINT AT KP:
TOTAL AMOUNT LINE
PRINT SEAT #
ORDER #
TRANSACTION VOID ITEMS
PLU CODE
PLU PRICE
You can determine the content of each
kitchen printer chit. For each item listed,
select N to remove print from the kitchen
printer.
Note: the TOTAL AMOUNT line includes a
line for TOTAL and TAX..
2
SORT KP BY KITCHEN PRINT
GROUP #
Use this option to create "priority print". For
example, if you wish to group appetizers at
the beginning of the chit, then entrees next,
place appetizers in a kitchen printer group
(see "PLU Status Group (PLU Status Link)"
on page 75) with a lower numeric value than
the value of the group to which entrees are
reported.
3
# LINE FEED AT BEGIN OF KP
PRINT
Enter the number of lines you wish to feed
before beginning kitchen printer print.
4
# LINE FEED AT END OF KP
PRINT
Enter the number of lines you wish to feed
after beginning kitchen printer print.
5
SEND ORDER TO KP:
AT SUBTOTAL
Choose Y if you wish to print when the
subtotal key is pressed, instead of when the
sale is finalized.
6
COMBINE LIKE ITEMS ON
KP OR KVS
If Y, for example, if two hamburgers are
entered and sent to the printer, they will print
as "2 HAMBURGERS", rather than
"1 HAMBURGER" and "1 HAMBURGER"
on a second line. If condiments are entered,
they will be separated and printed below the
items.
7
SEND ORDER TO KVS ON
SUBTOTAL
Choose Y if you wish to send items to the
KVS when the subtotal key is pressed, instead
of when the sale is finalized.
8
PRINT VOIDED ORDERS AT
KP OR KVS
If N, then transaction void orders will not
print or display at the appropriate
printer/screen.
9
KP IS: Y=REAL
TIME/N=BATCH
Real time means that each item will print at
the printer when the next item is entered (one
item delay). Batch means that the entire order
will print when the order is finalized.
10
KVS IS: Y=REAL
TIME/N=BATCH
Real time means that each item will display at
the screen when the next item is entered (one
item delay). Batch means that the entire order
will display when the order is finalized.
134  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
#
FIELD
Notes
11
USE KP ROUTER:
Choose from "THE SAME FOR ALL REG"
if all registers in the IRC system use the same
kitchen printer routing or "REGISTER
SEPARATELY" if different registers have
different routing. See "Kitchen Printer
Routing" on page 195
12
KP ORDER#
Choose from "COMBINATION OF
REG#&CONS#" or "GLOBAL ORDER#".
13
DISPLAY KP TIME PERIOD#
You can program four different KP routings
by time period (see "Kitchen Printer Routing"
on page 195). If Y, the operator display will
which of KP routing periods is active in the
lower left portion of the display.
14
DISPLAY KP ORDER #
Choose Y if you wish to display the order # in
the lower left portion of the operator screen
when the order is finalized.
15
SEPARATE KP BY KP GROUP
#
Choose Y if you wish to separate items from
different KP Groups and issue separate
kitchen printer tickets for items from each KP
Group.
16
SEPARATE KP BY KP ITEM
Choose Y to produce a separate requisition
for each main item.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  135
Validation/Subtotal Print Options
1. Select
VALIDATION/
SUBTOTAL PRINT
OPTIONS from the
SYSTEM OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The
validation and
subtotal print options
display with the first
option field selected.
(There is only one
page of validation
and subtotal print
options.)
VALIDATION/SUBTOTAL PRINT OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
VALIDATION AMT: Y=TOTAL/N=TENDER
CHK VALID AMT: Y=TOTAL/N=TENDER
ACTIVATE VALIDATION SENSOR
ALLOW MULTIPLE VALIDATIONS
PRINT VALIDATION MESSAGE
PRINT SBTL WHEN SBTL KEY PRESSED
VALIDATION PORT# (0-7)
DISPLAY A RUNNING SUBTL ON POLE
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
00
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
136  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Validation/Subtotal Print Options Program Notes
NOTE: To validate, you must attach a printer with validation capability to each
register that will validate. Use option #7 to identify the port to which the printer is
attached.
#
FIELD
Notes
1
VALIDATION AMT:
Y=TOTAL/N=TENDER
For sale validation, you can select either the
amount of the sale or the amount of the tender
as the amount to print on the validation.
2
CHK VALID AMT:
Y=TOTAL/N=TENDER
For check sale validation, you can select
either the amount of the sale or the amount of
the tender as the amount to print on the
validation.
3
ACTIVATE VALIDATION
SENSOR
The printer must be equipped with validation
option and sensor.
4
ALLOW MULTIPLE
VALIDATIONS
If Y, the validation can be done more than
once.
5
PRINT VALIDATION
MESSAGE
See "Validation Message" on page 166 to
program a message of up to three lines.
6
PRINT SBTL WHEN SBTL
KEY PRESSED
If Y, the receipt (if applicable) will print the
subtotal at the point in the transaction when
the key was pressed.
7
VALIDATION PORT# (0-7)
Indicate the port on the register that is
connected to the validation printer.
8
DISPLAY A RUNNING SUBTL
ON POLE
Allows the pole display to show a running
subtotal as items are entered.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  137
General Printing Options
1. Select GENERAL
PRINTING
OPTIONS from the
SYSTEM OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The general
printing options
display with the first
option field selected.
(There are four pages
of general printing
options.)
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
PRINT ON RECEIPT:
EMPLOYEE NAME
Y
CONSECUTIVE #
Y
ITEMS BY GROUP
N
DATE
Y
TIME
Y
PREAMBLE/POSTAMBLE
Y
ORDER #
Y
SEAT #
Y
RECEIPT FEED LINES AFTER PRINT
00
LINES AFTER PREAMBLE
00
LINES BEFORE POSTAMBLE
00
BUFFERED RECEIPT: Y=STUB/N=FULL
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.

PRINT RECEIPT WHEN SIGNING ON/OFF Y
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN CLOCKING IN/OUT Y
CONDENSE TRAY SBTL RECEIPTS
N
JOURNAL: Y=REAL TIME/N=BATCH
N
PRINT PLU CODE WITH DESCRIPTOR
Y
TRANSACTION # IS RANDOM NUMBER
N
HOME CURRENCY SYMBOL ($ DEFAULT) $
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #1
@
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #2
@
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #3
@
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #4
@
CONVERTED CURRENCY SYMBOL #5
@
PRINT TENDER ON RECEIPT
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS
19. DISABLE LINE FIND ON SLIP PRINTER N
20. GUEST CHECK PREAMBLE/POSTAMBLE
NONE 
21. PRINT RECEIPT AUTOMATICALLY
N
22. PRINT RCPT AFTER TIME CLOCK EDIT
N
23. PRINT GROUP NAME
N
WHEN PRINTING ITEMS BY GROUP
24. PRINT GUEST CHK PRINT COUNT ON GC N
25. PRINT IN DOUBLE
TOTAL
N
TENDER
N
CHANGE
N
ORDER #
N

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
138  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS
26.
27.
28.
29.
PRINT
PRINT
ALLOW
ITEMS
RCPT AUTOMATIC. IN VOID MODE N
NUMBER OF ITEMS ON RECEIPT
N
MULTIPLE RECEIPTS
Y
ON RCPT IS # OF ITEMS
PRINTED ONLY
N
30. COPY OF DATATRAN RECEIPT
01
31. PRINT TIP ON EFT RECEIPT
N
32. MASK NUMBER ON ALL CREDIT DRAFTS
Y

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
General Printing Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
PRINT ON RECEIPT:
Determine the content of each receipt by
selecting Y or N for each item.
2
RECEIPT FEED LINES
AFTER PRINT
Enter the number of lines you wish to feed
after each receipt is printed. (Makes chit
larger.)
3
LINES AFTER PREAMBLE
Enter the number of lines you wish to feed
after the preamble and before the first receipt
print line.
4
LINES BEFORE POSTAMBLE
Enter the number of lines you wish to after
the last receipt line and before the postamble.
5
BUFFERED RECEIPT:
Y=STUB/N=FULL
A stub receipt contains only the total, tender
and transaction information. A full receipt
includes item detail.
6
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN
SIGNING ON/OFF
If Y, a receipt is printed whenever an
employee signs off or on.
7
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN
CLOCKING IN/OUT
If Y, a receipt is printed whenever an
employee clocks in or out.
8
CONDENSE TRAY SBTL
RECEIPTS
Prints each separate tray subtotal receipt
without preamble/postamble.
9
JOURNAL:
Y=REAL TIME/N=BATCH
Prints journal on journal printer (or updates
electronic journal) line by line (real time) or
at transaction finalization (batch).
10
PRINT PLU CODE WITH
DESCRIPTOR
If Y, both the PLU# and descriptor will print
when a PLU is registered.
11
TRANSACTION # IS
RANDOM NUMBER
If Y, the transaction # is generated randomly,
rather than sequentially.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  139
#
FIELD
Notes
12
HOME CURRENCY SYMBOL
($ DEFAULT)
Select the currency symbol for display,
receipts, etc.
1317
CONVERTED CURRENCY
SYMBOL #1 - #5
Select the currency symbols to be used for the
currency conversion function keys.
18
PRINT TENDER ON RECEIPT
If N, the tender will not print on the receipt.
19
DISABLE LINE FIND ON SLIP
PRINTER
20
GUEST CHECK
PREAMBLE/POSTAMBLE
21
PRINT RECEIPT
AUTOMATICALLY
If an optional slip printer is used for hard
check operation, set this flag to Y to print
without automatic line feed.
Select NONE, GUEST CHECK LOGO
MESSAGE, or LOGO MESSAGE to
determine the content of the guest check
preamble/postamble
Choose Y to generate a receipt automatically
when transactions are tendered.
22
PRINT RCPT AFTER TIME
CLOCK EDIT
If Y, a receipt is printed whenever an
employee's time is edited.
23
PRINT GROUP NAME WHEN
PRINTING ITEMS BY GROUP
24
PRINT GUEST CHK PRINT
COUNT ON GC
If you set PRINT ON RECEIPT:ITEMS BY
GROUP to Y (General Printing Option #1),
and if you set this option to Y, then the group
name will be printed on the receipt.
If Y, a counter of the number of times the
guest check has been printed appears on the
check.
25
PRINT RCPT AUTOMATIC. IN
VOID MODE
If Y, a receipt will automatically be printed
for transactions in VOID mode.
26
PRINT NUMBER OF ITEMS
ON RECEIPT
If Y, a count of the number of items will
appear on each receipt.
27
ALLOW MULTIPLE
RECEIPTS
If Y, more than one copy of the receipt can be
issued after the sale.
28
ITEMS ON RCPT IS # OF
ITEMS PRINTED ONLY
29
ITEMS ON RCPT IS # OF
ITEMS PRINTED ONLY
30
COPY OF DATATRAN
RECEIPT
If Y, the item count on the receipt will include
only items printed on the receipt, and will not
include items programmed not to print on the
receipt.
If Y, the count of number of items will be
only the number printed. Use this option if
you are using PLU that are set to not print on
the receipt.
Enter the number of copies of the DataTran
(integrated payment) drafts.
31
PRINT TIP ON EFT RECEIPT
32
MASK NUMBER ON ALL
CREDIT DRAFTS
140  P-Mode Programming
If Y, the tip line will print on the payment
draft.
If Y, only the last four digits of the
credit/debit card number will print on the
draft.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Report Printing Options
1. Select REPORT
PRINTING
OPTIONS from the
SYSTEM OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The report
printing options
display with the first
option field selected.
(There are two pages
of report printing
options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
REPORT PRINTING OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ZERO SKIP:
FINANCIAL REPORT
Y
PLU REPORT
Y
EMPLOYEE REPORT
Y
GROUP REPORT
Y
TIME PERIOD REPORT
Y
ALL OTHER REPORTS WHEN PRINTING Y
PRINT % OF SALES ON PLU REPORT
Y
PRINT LINKED GROUPS ON PLU RPT
Y
PROMO/WASTE TOTALS ON PLU RPT
N
INDIV ITEM USAGE QTY ON PLU RPT
N
COUNT ON TIME REPORT IS
CUSTOMER 

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
REPORT PRINTING OPTIONS
7.
USE FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTORS IN RPT:
REPORT DESCRIPTOR 
8. PRINT MIN.STK RPT AFTER FINAN. RPT N
9. PRINT GRAND TOTAL ON FINANCIAL RPT Y
10. PRINT GROUPS BY EMPLOYEE REPORT
AFTER EMPLOYEE REPORT
N

SPS 1000 Program Manual
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  141
Report Printing Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
ZERO SKIP
Choose whether to print or skip totals with a
zero value on each of the listed reports.
2
PRINT % OF SALES ON PLU
REPORT
If Y, the percentage of each PLUs sales is
calculated and printed on the PLU report.
3
PRINT LINKED GROUPS ON
PLU RPT
If Y, each item on the PLU report will also
print the group number of each group to
which the PLU is linked.
4
PROMO/WASTE TOTALS ON
PLU RPT
If Y, the promo and waste detail for each PLU
will print on the PLU report.
5
INDIV ITEM USAGE QTY ON
PLU RPT
If Y, PLU report is adjusted to reflect
promo/waste totals.
6
COUNT ON TIME REPORT IS
Select Customer or Guest.
7
USE FUNCTION KEY
DESCRIPTORS IN RPT
Financial/employee reports include totals for
some function keys. The descriptor that
appears on the report can be the programmed
function key descriptor (see "Function Key"
on page 85) or can be the report descriptor
(see "Report Descriptors" on page 163.)
8
PRINT MIN.STK RPT AFTER
FINAN. RPT
If Y, an X1 minimum stock report will
automatically follow any financial X or Z
report.
9
PRINT GRAND TOTAL ON
FINANCIAL RPT
If Y, the Grand Total will print on the
Financial report.
10
PRINT GROUPS BY
EMPLOYEE REPORT AFTER
EMPLOYEE REPORT
If Y, the Groups by Employee report will
automatically print after the Employee report.
142  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Report Options
1. Select REPORT
OPTIONS from the
SYSTEM OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The report
options display with
the first option field
selected. (There are
two pages of report
printing options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
REPORT OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

ONLY TTL ON PROD MIX GROUP RPT
N
ONLY ITEMS WITH ACTUAL INV ENTRY
Y
CASH DECLARATION COMPULSORY
N
SIGN ON EMPLOYEE BEFORE REPORTS
N
ENFORCE ACTUAL INVENTORY BEFORE Z1 N
RETAIN ACTUAL INV ENTRIES IN X1
N
RESET PLU REPORT AT INVENTORY Z1? N
RESET INVENTORY REPORT AT PLU Z1? N
TIME KEEPING: Y=MINUTES/N=100 UNITSY
OMIT TAX TOTALS FROM NET SALES GT N
ALLOW Z OF OPEN CHECK REPORTS
Y
CONFIRM BEFORE TOTALS RESET ON Z
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
REPORT OPTIONS
13. RESET AFTER FINANCIAL Z REPORT:
GROSS SALES GT
NET SALES GT
NEGATIVE SALES GT
Z COUNTER
CONSECUTIVE #
14. VOID MODE TOTALS ADD TO GRAND TTLS
15. ALLOW Z WITH OPEN ORDERS
16. ALLOW Z STOCK REPORT
17. ALLOW Z1 TIME KEEPING RPOERT
WHEN EMPLOYEES ARE CLOCKED IN

SPS 1000 Program Manual
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  143
Report Options Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
ONLY TTL ON PROD MIX
GROUP RPT
If Y, skips sales by time period on the Product
Mix report.
2
ONLY ITEMS WITH ACTUAL
INV ENTRY
Affects the Inventory report (reporting
ingredients from the recipe system). If Y, the
Inventory report will report only those items
where actual inventory has been entered
through the EDIT INVENTORY ITEM
function of X-mode.
3
CASH DECLARATION
COMPULSORY
If Y, you must declare the amount of cash
before taking any report that reveals the
expected cash-in-drawer. This encourages
accurate reporting and over/short amounts are
calculated and printed.
4
SIGN ON EMPLOYEE
BEFORE REPORTS
If Y, an employee must be signed on in REG
mode before a report may be taken.
5
ENFORCE ACTUAL
INVENTORY BEFORE Z1
If Y, you must enter actual inventory before
running an inventory report.
6
RETAIN ACTUAL INV
ENTRIES IN X1
If Y, actual inventory entries are retained after
an X Inventory report. Use N, if you are
doing inventory spot-checks on selected
items.
7
RESET PLU REPORT AT
INVENTORY Z1?
If Y, a Z1 PLU report will automatically be
generated when an Inventory Z1 is taken.
8
RESET INVENTORY REPORT
AT PLU Z1?
If Y, an Inventory Z1 will automatically be
generated when a Z1 PLU report is taken.
9
TIME KEEPING:
Y=MINUTES/N=100 UNITS
Determine whether hours worked are
recorded and calculated in minutes or decimal
units of an hour.
10
OMIT TAX TOTALS FROM
NET SALES GT
Choose Y, to omit tax totals from the Net
Sales Grand total on the financial report.
11
ALLOW Z OF OPEN CHECK
REPORTS
Choose Y, to allow a Z open check report.
12
CONFIRM BEFORE TOTALS
RESET ON Z
If Y, a warning will display before any Z
report is initiated.
13
RESET AFTER FINANCIAL Z
REPORT:
Select which totals and counters are reset
when a Z1 Financial report is executed.
14
VOID MODE TOTALS ADD
TO GRAND TTLS
If Y, activity in the VOID key lock position
adds to grand totals.
15
ALLOW Z WITH OPEN
ORDERS
If Y, any Z report is disabled until open
orders are closed.
144  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
#
FIELD
Notes
16
ALLOW Z STOCK REPORT
If Y, resetting the Stock report is allowed.
17
ALLOW Z1 TIME KEEPING
REPORT WHEN EMPLOYEES
ARE CLOCKED IN
If Y, the time keeping report can be run when
employees are clocked in.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  145
Time Keeping Options
1. Select TIME
KEEPING OPTIONS
from the SYSTEM
OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The time
keeping options
display with the first
option field selected.
(There is one page of
time keeping
options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
146  P-Mode Programming
TIME KEEPING OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
OVERTIME HOUR IS USED FOR
DAY 
HOURS PER OVERTIME STARTS
008
OVERTIME FACTOR
1.5
ENFORCE OUT FOR BREAK OR OUT ENTRY? Y
TIP REPORTING % OF SALES
15.0000
EMPLOYEE TIME-IN/OUT
EMPLOYEE# 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Time Keeping Option Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
OVERTIME HOUR IS USED
FOR
Select Day or Week.
2
HOURS PER OVERTIME
STARTS
Enter the number of hours that must be
worked per day or week before overtime
starts. For example, if field #1 is day, enter 8
hours, or if field #1 is week, enter 40 hours.
3
OVERTIME FACTOR
Enter the factor times which the standard pay
rate is multiplied to determine overtime pay,
i.e. enter 1.5 if rate is time and one half, or
enter 2.0 if rate is double time.
4
ENFORCE OUT FOR BREAK
OR OUT ENTRY?
When clocking out there is a choice for [OUT
FOR BREAK] or [OUT]. If Y, you must
enter the appropriate number for either
choice, rather than just pressing ENTER to
choose the default.
5
TIP REPORTING % OF
SALES
If Y, the percentage entered here is calculated
and reported on the Employee report.
6
EMPLOYEE TIME-IN/OUT
Select Employee # or Secret Code.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  147
E.J. (Electronic Journal) & Detail Printing Options
1. Select E.J.
PRINTING
OPTIONS from the
SYSTEM OPTION
PROGRAMMING
screen. The first
option field is
selected. (There are
two pages of E.J. &
Detail Printing
options.)
2. Select fields and
change information in
the same manner as
described for general
options.
E.J. & DETAIL PRINTING OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.

ACTIVATE ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
DISPLAY E.J. BUFFER FULL WARNING?
E.J. OVERRIDE WHEN BUFFFER FULL?
SEND TO E.J.:
CASH TRANSACTIONS
CHECK TRANSACTIONS
MISC TENDER TRANSACTIONS
TRANSACTIONS WITH %
RECD ACCT & PAID OUT
RETURN TRANSACTIONS
TRANSACTIONS WITH ERR CORR&VOID
NO SALES
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
E.J. & DETAIL PRINTING OPTIONS
4. SEND TO E.J.:
CANCEL TRANSACTIONS
TRANSACTIONS WITH NEGATIVE ITEMS
REPORTS
PROGRAM SCANS
CHECK TRACKING
5. SEND TO DETAIL:
TRANSACTIONS WITH NEGATIVE ITEMS
REPORTS
PROGRAM SCANS

148  P-Mode Programming
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
E.J. (Electronic Journal) & Detail Printing Option Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
1
ACTIVATE ELECTRONIC
JOURNAL
Select Y to activate the electronic journal.
2
DISPLAY E.J. BUFFER FULL
WARNING?
Select Y to display a warning message when
the electronic journal is full.
3
E.J. OVERRIDE WHEN
BUFFFER FULL?
Select Y to allow operations to continue when
the electronic journal is full. Only the most
current transactions will be maintained as
memory allows.
4
SEND TO E.J.:
For each type of function or transaction listed,
select Y or N to determine it will be recorded
in the electronic journal.

CASH TRANSACTIONS

CHECK TRANSACTIONS

MISC TENDER TRANSACTIONS

TRANSACTIONS WITH %

RECD ACCT & PAID OUT

RETURN TRANSACTIONS

TRANSACTIONS WITH ERR CORR&VOID

NO SALES

CANCEL TRANSACTIONS

TRANSACTIONS WITH NEGATIVE ITEMS**

REPORTS

PROGRAM SCANS

CHECK TRACKING
**Regardless of other settings, will send only transactions
with negative items, % entries, tenders, etc. to the journal.
5
SEND TO DETAIL:
For each type of function or transaction listed,
select Y or N to determine it will be sent to
the appropriate detail/journal printer.

TRANSACTIONS WITH NEGATIVE ITEMS**

REPORTS

PROGRAM SCANS
**Regardless of other settings, will send only
transactions with negative items, % entries,
tenders, etc. to the detail.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  149
Taxes
1. Select TAXES from
the P-Mode menu to
display the TAX
PROGRAMMING
Screen.
2. Choose a tax from the
menu in one of two
ways:
TAX PROGRAMMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
TAX
TAX
TAX
TAX
TAX
TAX
1
2
3
4
5
6
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and
press ENTER.
3. The tax calculation
pop-up window
displays. Select ADD
ON, TAX TABLE, or
VAT.
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
TAX PROGRAMMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
TAX
TAX
TAX
TAX
TAX
TAX
1
2
3
4
5
6
ADD ON
TAX TABLE
VAT
ADD ON
ADD ON
ENTER 
150  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Add On Taxes
Options for add on taxes
1-5 are shown on the
screen at the right.
1. Press the    
keys to select the
field you wish to edit.
Type new
information and press
ENTER.
TAX#1 BY ADD ON
RATE
THRESHOLD
HIGH HOLD
2. Press ESC to return
to the TAX
PROGRAMMING
MENU.
00.000
00.00
0000000.00
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
TAX#6 BY ADD ON
NOTE: Options for add
on tax 6 are shown on
the screen at the right.
Tax 6 should be used for
the Canadian Goods
and Services tax (GST).
Here you have the
option of taxing the
GST by other applicable
rates (tax on tax).
RATE
THRESHOLD
HIGH HOLD
GST(TAX6) IS TAXABLE BY RATE
00.000
00.00
0000000.00
1 2 3 4 5
N N N N N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Add On Taxes Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
RATE
Enter the tax rate. If fractional, press the decimal
and up to three digits.
THRESHOLD
Enter the lowest amount where tax is charged.
HIGH HOLD
Tax is no longer charged after the amount entered
here.
GST(TAX6) IS TAXABLE BY
RATE
Indicate the tax number of any taxes that accrue on
the GST tax amount (tax on tax).
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  151
Tax Table
Options for taxes by tax
table are shown on the
screen at the right.
1. Press the    
keys to select the
field you wish to edit.
Type new
information and press
ENTER. Press
PAGE UP or PAGE
DN to access
additional break point
differences. You can
program a maximum
of 100 break points.
2. Press ESC to return
to the TAX
PROGRAMMING
MENU.
TAX#1 BY TABLE
MAXIMUM NON-TAXABLE AMOUNT
FIRST TAX AMOUNT CHARGED
# OF NON REPEAT BREAKS
# OF REPEAT BREAKS
BREAK POINT 1
BREAK POINT 2
BREAK POINT 3
BREAK POINT 4
BREAK POINT 5
BREAK POINT 6
BREAK POINT 7
BREAK POINT 8

00.10
00.01
05
03
00.21
00.38
00.56
00.73
00.91
01.08
01.24
01.41
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Entries shown are for the
Illinois 6% sample table
shown on the next page.
Tax Table Programming Notes
Field
Note
FIRST TAX AMOUNT
CHARGED
Enter the first tax amount that is charged. For this
example the entry is 0.01.
MAXIMUM NONTAXABLE AMOUNT
Enter the highest amount where no tax is charged. For
this example the entry is 0.10.
# OF NON-REPEAT
BREAKS
Enter the number of Non-repeat breaks. For this example
the entry is 5.
# OF REPEAT BREAKS
Enter the number of repeat breaks. For this example the
entry is 3.
BREAK POINT 1-100
Enter the high amount in the range. For example, if the
break point is .22 - .38, enter .38 for the break point.
152  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Tax Table Programming Example - Illinois 6% Tax Table
1. Examine the printed tax table for the tax you are programming.
2. Examine the pattern of break point differences to determine when the break
points begin to repeat. Mark the beginning break points that do not fit a pattern
as “non-repeat breaks.” Mark the break points that are repeating in a pattern as
“repeat breaks.” Count the number of repeat and non-repeat breaks.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Tax Charged
Sale Amount Range
$0.00
$0.00 - $0.10
$0.01
$0.11 - $0.21
$0.02
$0.22 - $0.38
$0.03
$0.39 - $0.56
$0.04
$0.57 - $0.73
$0.05
$0.74 - $0.91
$0.06
$0.92 - $1.08
$0.07
$1.09 - $1.24
$0.08
$1.25 - $1.41
$0.09
$1.42 - $1.58
$0.10
$1.59 - $1.74
$0.11
$1.75 - $1.91
$0.12
$1.92 - $2.08
$0.13
$2.09 - $2.24
$0.14
$2.25 - $2.41
Break point s
Non-Repeat
Repeat
P-Mode Programming  153
VAT
Options for VAT taxes 15 are shown on the screen
at the right.
TAX#1 BY VAT
RATE
00.000
1. Press the    
keys to select the
field you wish to edit.
Type new
information and press
ENTER.
2. Press ESC to return
to the TAX
PROGRAMMING
MENU.
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
TAX#6 BY VAT
Options for VAT tax 6
are shown on the screen
at the right. Tax 6
should be used for the
Canadian Goods and
Services tax (GST).
Here you have the
option of taxing the
GST by other applicable
rates (tax on tax).
RATE
GST(TAX6) IS TAXABLE BY RATE
00.000
1 2 3 4 5
N N N N N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
VAT Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
GST(TAX6) IS TAXABLE BY
RATE
Indicate the tax number of any taxes that accrue on
the GST tax amount (tax on tax).
154  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Messages
1. Choose MESSAGES
from the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
MESSAGES MENU
screen.
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
MESSAGES MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
LOGO MESSAGE
ERROR MESSAGE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTORS
REPORT DESCRIPTORS
CHECK ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
GUEST CHECK LOGO MESSAGE
VALIDATION MESSAGE
DATATRAN MESSAGE
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Press  or  to move
the cursor to your
choice and press
ENTER.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  155
Logo Message
1. Choose LOGO
MESSAGE to display
the LOGO
MESSAGE
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Set the JUSTIFY
option to center, left
or right justify your
message.
3. Type the preamble
message in the space
provided, up to 40
characters per line.
Press the    
keys to move the
cursor to a new
position.
4. Press PAGE DN to
program the logo
postamble. Type the
message in the space
provided. Up to 40
characters per line.
Press the    
keys to move the
cursor to a new
position.
LOGO MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
JUSTIFY:
CENTER
PREAMBLE #1:
PREAMBLE #2:
PREAMBLE #3:
PREAMBLE #4:
PREAMBLE #5:

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
LOGO MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
ALPHA
POSTAMBLE #1:
POSTAMBLE #2:
POSTAMBLE #3:
POSTAMBLE #4:
POSTAMBLE #5:

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
5. Press ESC to exit the
screen and return to
the MESSAGES
MENU screen.
156  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Error Messages
Using this program, you can change the standard error messages from the default settings to
messages that meet your language or application needs.
1. Choose ERROR
MESSAGE from the
MESSAGES MENU
to display the
ERROR MESSAGE
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Select a message to
edit. Press the  or 
keys and the PAGE
UP or PAGE DN
keys as necessary.
3. With a message
selected, type a new
message up to 30
characters in length.
ERROR MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
ALPHA
ERR#001
ERR#002
ERR#003
ERR#004
ERR#005
ERR#006
ERR#007
ERR#008
ERR#009
ERR#010
ERR#011
ERR#012
(NOT USE)
(NOT USE)
AMOUNT REQUIRED
BAD VALUE
BUFFER FULL
BUFFER EMPTY
BUSY
BAD COMMAND
CASH DECLARATION REQUIRED
CASH-IN-DRAWER EXCEEDED
CHECK# ASSIGNED AUTO
CHECK# REQUIRED !

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
4. Press ENTER to
finalize each message
entry.
5. Press ESC to exit the
screen and return to
the MESSAGES
MENU screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  157
Default Error Message List
ERR#001
ERR#002
ERR#003
ERR#004
ERR#005
ERR#006
ERR#007
ERR#008
ERR#009
ERR#010
ERR#011
ERR#012
ERR#013
ERR#014
ERR#015
ERR#016
ERR#017
ERR#018
ERR#019
ERR#020
ERR#021
ERR#022
ERR#023
ERR#024
ERR#025
ERR#026
ERR#027
ERR#028
ERR#029
ERR#030
ERR#031
ERR#032
ERR#033
ERR#034
ERR#035
ERR#036
ERR#037
ERR#038
ERR#039
ERR#040
ERR#041
ERR#042
ERR#043
ERR#044
ERR#045
ERR#046
ERR#047
ERR#048
ERR#049
ERR#050
ERR#051
ERR#052
ERR#053
ERR#054
(NOT USE)
(NOT USE)
AMOUNT REQUIRED
BAD VALUE
BUFFER FULL
BUFFER EMPTY
BUSY
BAD COMMAND
CASH DECLARATION REQUIRED
CASH-IN-DRAWER EXCEEDED
CHECK# ASSIGNED AUTO
CHECK# REQUIRED !
CONDIMENT REQUIRED!
CRC ERROR
TABLE NUMBER IN USE
EAT-IN/TAKE-OUT/DRV-THRU
ENTER EMPLOYEE CODE
ENTER EMPLOYEE #
ENTER GUEST COUNT
ENTER SEAT#
ENTER TABLE#
ENTRY REQUIRED
ERROR
ERROR JAM
TABLE NUMBER IN USE
HALO OVER!
ILLEGAL KEY SEQUENCE
IN USE!
INACTIVE!
INPUT QTY
KITCHEN PRINTER FAILURE
MANAGER REQUIRED
MANAGER OVERRIDE REQUIRE
MEMORY FULL
NEGATIVE
NO CHECK#
NO DATA
NO DRAWER!
NO MANUAL ENTRY
NO PAPER
NO PLU!
NON ADD# REQUIRED
NOT DISCOUNTABLE
NOT PROGRAMMED!
NOT READY!
NOT ZERO
OFF LINE!
OPEN DRAWER
P/BAL REQUIRED
PAPER END
RANGE OVER
REMOVE PAPER
SCALE FAIL!
SCALE REQUIRED!
158  P-Mode Programming
ERR#055
ERR#056
ERR#057
ERR#058
ERR#059
ERR#060
ERR#061
ERR#062
ERR#063
ERR#064
ERR#065
ERR#066
ERR#067
ERR#068
ERR#069
ERR#070
ERR#071
ERR#072
ERR#073
ERR#074
ERR#075
ERR#076
ERR#077
ERR#078
ERR#079
ERR#080
ERR#081
ERR#082
ERR#083
ERR#084
ERR#085
ERR#086
ERR#087
ERR#088
ERR#089
ERR#090
ERR#091
ERR#092
ERR#093
ERR#094
ERR#095
ERR#096
ERR#097
ERR#098
ERR#099
ERR#100
ERR#101
ERR#102
ERR#103
ERR#104
ERR#105
ERR#106
ERR#107
ERR#108
SINGLE ITEM!
SUBTOTAL REQUIRED
SYSTEM ERROR
TARE# REQUIRED
TRAY SUBTOTAL REQUIRED!
VALIDATION REQUIRED
WASTE REQUIRED!
WRONG EMPLOYEE
SIGN OFF REQUIRED
ZERO AMOUNT
PRICE LEVEL MISMATCH
OVERRIDE NOT ALLOWED
WRONG SEQUENCE
WRONG COMMAND
WRONG FILE NO
WRONG ITEMIZER
UNDER TEND NOT ALLOWED
OVER TEND NOT ALLOWED
CHECK TRACKING ERROR
CHECK# IN USE
PLU NOT ALLOWED
CONDIMENT PLU NOT ALLOWED
NON-CONDIMENT PLU NOT ALLOWED
FUNCTION KEY NOT ALLOWED
THIS KEY NOT ALLOWED
NO FUNCTION KEY
NO PROGRAMMABLE KEY
X/TIME REQUIRED
INVALID AUTHORITY LEVEL
TIME IN REQUIRED
SIGN ON REQUIRED
MEMORY NOT ALLOCATED
THIS EMP. RPT MUST BE CLEARED
ERROR STATUS
ERROR VALUE
ERROR SYSTEM OPTION
ERROR EMPLOYEE
ERROR TABLE NO
SCALE MOTION
OVER WEIGHT
UNDER WEIGHT
PROMO NOT ALLOWED
WASTE NOT ALLOWED
NO FOOD STAMP AMOUNT
DECIMAL ENTRY NOT ALLOWED
SPLIT PRICING NOT ALLOWED
VOID MODE IS DEACTIVATED
JOB CODE REQUIRED
JOB CODE CHANGE NOT ALLOWED
PUSH BUTTON ENTRY REQUIRED
EMPLOYEE CODE NOT LINKED
TENDERING IS NOT ALLOWED
OVER REGULAR HOURS PER WEEK
MUST <= LINE# PER TRANSACTION
SPS 1000 Program Manual
ERR#109
ERR#110
ERR#111
ERR#112
ERR#113
ERR#114
ERR#115
ERR#116
ERR#117
ERR#118
ERR#119
ERR#120
ERR#121
ERR#122
ERR#123
ERR#124
ERR#125
ERR#126
ERR#127
ERR#128
ERR#129
ERR#130
ERR#131
ERR#132
ERR#133
ERR#134
ERR#135
ERR#136
ERR#137
ERR#138
ERR#139
ERR#140
ERR#141
ERR#142
ERR#143
ERR#144
ERR#145
ERR#146
MUST <= LINE# PER SOFT CHECK
NO STOCK PLU
NEGATIVE CARD
LINKED STATUS REQUIRED
RETURN TO X-MODE
ERROR - SLIP PAPER
LOCAL PRINTER REQUIRED
MODE ERROR
SET DATE&TIME IS DEACTIVATED
EMPLOYEE SHOULD BE DIFFERENT
TRANSFER NOT ALLOWED
REQ GALLONAGE AMOUNT
AVAILABLE ONLY IN CHECK
SPLIT THIS ITEM NOT POSSIBLE
FUNCTION KEY NOT INCLUDED
ERROR POST TENDER
NO TRACKING DATA IN THIS REG
NO TIME KEEP DATA IN THIS REG
MULTIPLICATION LIMIT EXCEEDED
TAB OF FIELD2 TOO BIG
NON-PLU CODE RANGE OVER
TARE ENTRY NOT ALLOWED
MISC TEND REQUIRED
SAME CHECK TRACK REQUIRED
NOT SCALEABLE PLU
EJ BUFFER FULL
MUST BE START<=END IN RANGE
RANGE OVERLAP
FINAL END SHOULD BE 9 OR 99
NOT PLU
NOT WLU
PRINT KEY REQUIRED
SURCHARGE NOT ALLOWED
DECIMAL ENTRY REQUIRED
SYSTEM REG# REQUIRED
TRAINING EMP FILE# REQUIRED
TIME IN/OUT REG# REQUIRED
CHECK TRACKING REG# REQUIRED
SPS 1000 Program Manual
ERR#147 ELECTRONIC JOURNAL INACTIVE
ERR#148 CHECK ENDORSEMENT REQUIRED
ERR#149 EFT TERMINAL TRANS.KEY ERROR
ERR#150 CARD ERROR
ERR#151 PRINTER OFFLINE
ERR#152 KV OFFLINE
ERR#153 NO RELOCATABLE KEY
ERR#154 CLERK KEY ERROR
ERR#155 ENFORCE ACTUAL INVENTORY
ERR#156 AUTHORITY LEVEL NOT LINKED
ERR#157 WEIGHT IS ZERO
ERR#158 STOCK IS NOT ZERO
ERR#159 CLEAR CAN NOT BE REMOVED
ERR#160 ENTER CAN NOT BE REMOVED
ERR#161 YES/NO CANNOT BE REMOVED
ERR#162 THIS NUMERIC CAN'T BE REMOVED
ERR#163 INCORRECT CODE
ERR#164 SOFT CHECK ONLY
ERR#165 INACTIVE PLU
ERR#166 MULTIPLE DISCOUNT NOT
ALLOWED
ERR#167 NEW CHECK OPENED
ERR#168 NO MORE SPLIT TENDER ALLOWED
ERR#169 CHECK POLE DISPLAY
ERR#170 MUST MAX.NONTAXABLE<=BRK PNT1
ERR#171 MUST BRK PNT n <= BRK PNT N+1
ERR#172 NOT ALLOWED WITH OPEN ORDERS
ERR#173 NOW POLLING !!
ERR#174 INCORRECT TARE WEIGHT
ERR#175 VOID PROMO FIRST
ERR#176 MULTIPLE RECEIPTS NOT ALLOWED
ERR#177 MCR REQUIRED
ERR#178 X/TIME NOT ALLOWED
ERR#179 OUT OF STOCK
ERR#180 AGE RESTRICTION
ERR#181 Z STOCK NOT ALLOWED
ERR#182 Z1 TIME KEEPING NOT ALLOWED
ERR#183 PLU NOT INCLUDED
P-Mode Programming  159
System Descriptors
Using this program, you can change the standard system descriptors from the default settings
to messages that meet your language or application needs.
The length of each descriptor varies. For example day of week fields are 3 characters, while
other printed messages are 5 characters or more.
1. Choose SYSTEM
DESCRIPTORS to
display the SYSTEM
DESCRIPTOR
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Press the    
keys to move the
cursor to a new
position. Type a new
message over the
default descriptor.
3. Press ESC to exit the
screen and return to
the MESSAGES
MENU screen.
160  P-Mode Programming
SYSTEM DESCRIPTOR PROGRAMMING
ALPHA
#001
#002
#003
#004
#005
#006
#007
#008
#009
#010
#011
#012
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
MGR
TAXES
TOTAL
FSTAX
FSTTL

ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Default System Descriptor List
#001
#002
#003
#004
#005
#006
#007
#008
#009
#010
#011
#012
#013
#014
#015
#016
#017
#018
#019
#020
#021
#022
#023
#024
#025
#026
#027
#028
#029
#030
#031
#032
#033
#034
#035
#036
#037
#038
#039
#040
#041
#042
#043
#044
#045
#046
#047
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
MGR
TAXES
TOTAL
FSTAX
FSTTL
FSCNG
DATE
TIME
NO.
CASH
CHECK
MISC
REG
PLU#
PBAL
SEAT#
ESC
TBL
GST
EMPL
FOR
AMOUNT REQUIRED
******TRAINING*****
TIME CLOCK - IN
TIME CLOCK - OUT
EMPLOYEE SIGN ON
EMPLOYEE SIGN OFF
DECLARE CASH TIPS
  ENT
  ENT DONE
  ENT X/TM
  ENT DONE X/TM
ADD CHECKS FOR PAYMENT
** NOT CLOSED CHECKS **
ENTER NEW SEAT#
ALPHA MESSAGE:
EMPLOYEE
AMT DUE
CHANGE
JOB CODE
SPS 1000 Program Manual
#048
#049
#050
#051
#052
#053
#054
#055
#056
#057
#058
#059
#060
#061
#062
#063
#064
#065
#066
#067
#068
#069
#079
#071
#072
#073
#074
#075
#076
#077
#078
#079
#080
#081
#082
#083
#084
#085
#086
#087
#088
#089
#090
#091
#092
#093
#094
#095
SUMMARY
OUT FOR BRK
OUT
OPERATOR
NON-ADD#
INPUT QTY
ENTER TIME:
VOID
PAYMENT
HOME AMT
FSCRT
FS EXMT
SCALE CANCEL
ITEMS
TIP DECLARED
TAXABLE 1
TAXABLE 2
TAXABLE 3
TAXABLE 4
TAXABLE 5
TAXABLE 6
TAX1 AMT
TAX2 AMT
TAX3 AMT
TAX4 AMT
TAX5 AMT
TAX6 AMT
VAT1 AMT
VAT2 AMT
VAT3 AMT
VAT4 AMT
VAT5 AMT
VAT6 AMT
EXEMPT TAX1
EXEMPT TAX2
EXEMPT TAX3
EXEMPT TAX4
EXEMPT TAX5
EXEMPT TAX6
TAX TOTAL
NO SEAT
POST TENDER
SYSTEM
BALANCE
CHECK#
CLOCK OUT
CLOSED
PRICE/HALO
P-Mode Programming  161
#096
#097
#098
#099
#100
#101
#102
#103
DESCRIPTOR
LINK GROUP
LINK STATUS
CHANGE RATE
FOREIGN AMT
REG MODE
VD MODE
MGR MODE
162  P-Mode Programming
#104
#105
#106
#107
#108
#109
#110
#111
CONV
GAS CNT
GAS AMT
ORDER#
REPRINT
GROUP0
DELETED PLU
PREPAID TTL
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Report Descriptors
Using this program, you can change the standard descriptors that appear on financial and
employee reports from the default settings to descriptors that meet your language or
application needs.
1. Choose REPORT
DESCRIPTORS from
the MESSAGES
MENU. From the
pop-up menu, select
EMPLOYEE or
FINANCIAL report
to edit the descriptors
on the selected report.
MESSAGES MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2. Select a descriptor to
edit. Press the  or 
keys and the PAGE
UP or PAGE DN
keys as necessary.
3. With a descriptor
field selected, type a
new descriptor up to
16 characters in
length.
4. Press ENTER to
finalize each
descriptor entry, press
ESC to exit the screen
and return to the
MESSAGES MENU
screen.
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
FINANCIAL REPORT DESC. PROGRAMMING ALPHA
#001
#002
#003
#004
#005
#006
#007
#008
#009
#010
#011
#012

SPS 1000 Program Manual
LOGO MESSAGE
ERROR MESSAGE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTORS
REPORT DESCRIPTORS
CHECK EN 1 . F I N A N C I A L R E P O R T
CHECK CH 2. EMPLOYEE REPORT
+PLU
-PLU
+PLU
-PLU
+PLU
-PLU
+PLU
-PLU
+PLU
-PLU
+PLU
-PLU
LVL1
LVL1
LVL2
LVL2
LVL3
LVL3
LVL4
LVL4
LVL5
LVL5
LVL6
LVL6
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  163
Check Endorsement Message
1. Choose CHECK
ENDORSEMENT
MESSAGE to display
the CHECK
ENDORSEMENT
MESSAGE
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Set the JUSTIFY
option to center, left
or right justify your
message.
3. Type a message in the
space provided. Up
to 40 characters per
line. Press the   
 keys to move the
cursor to a new
position.
4. Press PAGE DN to
program lines 6-10 of
the message.
5. Press ESC to exit the
screen and return to
the MESSAGES
MENU screen.
164  P-Mode Programming
CHECK ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
JUSTIFY:
CENTER 
LINE #1
LINE #2
LINE #3
LINE #4
LINE #5

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
CHECK ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
LINE #6
LINE #7
LINE #8
LINE #9
LINE #10

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Guest Check Logo Message
1. Choose GUEST
CHECK MESSAGE
to display the GUEST
CHECK MESSAGE
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Set the JUSTIFY
option to center, left
or right justify your
message
3. Type a message in the
space provided. Up
to 40 characters per
line. Press the   
 keys to move the
cursor to a new
position.
GUEST CHECK LOGO MSG PROGRAMMING
JUSTIFY:
CENTER
LINE #1
LINE #2
LINE #3
LINE #4
LINE #5

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GUEST CHECK LOGO MSG PROGRAMMING
LINE #6
L1
LINE #7
4. Press PAGE DN to
program lines 6-10 of
the message.
LINE #8
5. Press ESC to exit the
screen and return to
the MESSAGES
MENU screen.
LINE #10
LINE #9

SPS 1000 Program Manual
L1
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  165
Validation Message
1. Choose
VALIDATION
MESSAGE to display
the VALIDATION
MESSAGE
PROGRAMMING
screen.
VALIDATION MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
JUSTIFY:
CENTER 
LINE #1
LINE #2
LINE #3
2. Set the JUSTIFY
option to center, left
or right justify your
message.
3. Type a message in the
space provided. Up
to 40 characters per
line. Press the   
 keys to move the
cursor to a new
position.
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
4. Press ESC to exit the
screen and return to
the MESSAGES
MENU screen.
166  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
DataTran Message
1. Choose DATATRAN
MESSAGE to display
the DATATRAN
MESSAGE
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Set the JUSTIFY
option to center, left
or right justify your
message.
3. Type a merchant
information in the
spaces
4.
VALIDATION MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
CENTER 
JUSTIFY:
MERCHANT NAME
MERCHANT ADDRESS 1
MERCHANT ADDRESS 2
MERCHANT PHONE NO.
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
provided. Up to 40
characters per line.
Press the    
keys to move the
cursor to a new
position.
5. Press ESC to exit the
screen and return to
the MESSAGES
MENU screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  167
Window Look Up (WLU)
Overview
There are three types of items that can be found on a Window Look-Up (WLU): condiments,
functions, and PLUs. The same WLU can contain any combination of condiments, functions,
and PLUs.
Specific features and rules for WLUs are summarized below:

A specific WLU can be activated automatically after a PLU is entered. (See "PLU
Programming" on page 69.)

Pressing a WLU key on the keyboard can activate a specific WLU. (See "Keyboard
Key Relocation in S-Mode Programming.) Or, by placing the WLU# key on the
keyboard, any number of WLUs can be accessed by typing the WLU number and
pressing the WLU# key.

A WLU can be linked to a subsequent WLU in order to prompt an operator through a
sequence of selections.

Adding them in a specific order can control the order in which items appear on a
WLU. Items can be deleted or items can be added in the middle of a list.

The total number of WLUs and the capacity of each WLU is set in memory
allocation. (See "Memory Allocation " in S-Mode Programming.) The default
capacity of each WLU is 28 items; the maximum capacity is 50 items.
168  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
WLU Programming
The first step in WLU programming is to select individual options for the WLU. Next, a list
of items (Condiments, PLUs and/or functions) is assigned.
1. Select WINDOW
LOOK UP (WLU)
from the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
WLU#
PROGRAMMING
Screen.
2. Type the WLU
number and press
ENTER, or press
PAGE UP or PAGE
DN to scroll to the
WLU you wish to
program.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
1. TITLE :
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
ALLOW PLU
ALLOW FUNCTIONS
3. # OF ITEM CHOICES(0=UNLMITED)
4. ITEM MULTIPLICATION?
5 ALLOW EXIT FROM TABLE WITH DONE?
6. LINK TO WLU# (0=NO LINK)
N
N
N
00
N
Y
00
EDIT ITEMS 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press the    
keys to select a field
to edit:
 For yes/no fields,
press the Y/N key to
toggle from yes to no.
 For numeric fields,
type new value.
WLU Program Notes
#
Field
Notes
1
TITLE
Enter a descriptor up to 12 characters in
length.
2
ALLOW CONDIMENTS
ALLOW PLU
ALLOW FUNCTIONS
Select Y or N to determine the type of items
that are allowed to display on the WLU. For
example, if you select N for ALLOW
FUNCTIONS, you cannot add a function to
this WLU.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  169
#
Field
Notes
3
# OF ITEM CHOICES
(0=UNLMITED)
If you select 1 in this field, when a condiment
is selected from the WLU, the WLU is
automatically closed. In the same manner, if
you select 2, the WLU is automatically closed
after the second WLU is registered. If you
select 0, any number of selections can be
made. Pressing DONE then closes the WLU.
4
CONDIMENT
MULTIPLICATION?
If Y, when a quantity of main items are sold,
then condiments are entered by multiplication
until the quantity of condiments matches the
quantity of main items. For example, 5 of the
main item "chicken dinner" are entered. The
WLU displays the selections "regular" and
"crispy". The WLU will close when the
quantity of 5 is reached, i.e. 3 times "regular"
and 2 times "crispy".
170  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Editing WLU Items
1. If you wish to add or
delete items from the
WLU, press the  or
 keys until you
select EDIT ITEMS
and press ENTER.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
1. TITLE :
CONDIMENTS
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
Y
ALLOW PLU
Y
ALLOW FUNCTIONS
Y
3. # OF ITEM CHOICES (0=UNLMITD)
00
4. CONDIMENT MULTIPLICATION?
N
5 ALLOW EXIT FROM TABLE WITH DONE?
Y
6. LINK TO WLU#
(0=NO LINK)
00
EDIT ITEMS 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
2. On the right side of
the screen, the WLU
window will display
looking exactly like it
will when it is used in
operations. An
instruction screen
displays in a window
on the left portion of
the screen.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU OR
CONDIMENTS
1.
TITLE : ENTER
CONDIMENT
2.
ALLOW
CONDIMENTS
# AND
[PLU]
OR
ALLOW PLU
PLUALLOW
KEY OR
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3.
# OF ITEM
LIST
4. CONDIMENT MULTI
5-FUNCTIONS
ALLOW EXIT FROM
PRESS
6.
LINKFUNCTION
TO WLU# (0=
    ENT
N
N
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
PRESS [DELETE]
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  171
Adding PLUs or Condiments to a WLU
1. To add PLUs or
Condiments to the
WLU:

Press the PLU key on
the keyboard, or

Type the PLU
number and press
PLU, or

Press PLU directly to
display the PLU list.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
PLU LIST
1. TITLE :
120 ORIGINAL
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
N
ALLOW PLU 123 CRISPY
N
135 BBQ
ALLOW FUNCTIONS
N
136 CATSUP
3. # OF CONDIMENT
CHOICES (0=UNLMITED)00
4. CONDIMENT 138
MULTIPLICATION?
N
MUSTARD
5 ALLOW EXIT140
FROM
TABLE WITH DONE?
Y
ONION
6. LINK TO WLU#
LINK)
00
141 (0=NO
PICKLE
EDIT ITEMS

142 RELISH
143 MAYO
144 BUTTER
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN

Scroll indicator show that
more items follows this page.
2. Press the  or  keys
to select a PLU or
condiment PLU from
the list.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
PLU LIST
1. TITLE :
120
ORIGINAL
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
N
123
CRISPY
ALLOW PLU
N
135 BBQ
ALLOW FUNCTIONS
N
136 CATSUP
3. # OF CONDIMENT
CHOICES (0=UNLMITED)00
4. CONDIMENT 138
MULTIPLICATION?
N
MUSTARD
5 ALLOW EXIT140
FROM
TABLE WITH DONE?
Y
ONION
6. LINK TO WLU#
(0=NO
LINK)
00
141 PICKLE
EDIT ITEMS

142 RELISH
143 MAYO
144 BUTTER
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN

3. Press ENTER to
place the PLU or
condiment PLU item
on the WLU.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU OR
1.
TITLE : ENTER
CONDIMENT
2.
ALLOW
CONDIMENTS
# AND
[PLU]
OR
ALLOW PLU
PLUALLOW
KEY OR
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3.
# OF ITEM
LIST
4. CONDIMENT
5-FUNCTIONS
ALLOW EXIT
PRESS
6.
LINKFUNCTION
TO WLU# (0
CONDIMENTS
1 CATSUP
N
   ENT N
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
[
]
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
172  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
4. Continue to add items
by either pressing
PLU key, typing the
PLU number and
pressing ENTER, or
selecting the PLU
from the PLU list.
The last item entered
on the WLU list
remains selected.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU OR
1. TITLE :
CONDIMENT ENTER
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
# AND
[PLU]
ALLOW
PLU OR
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3.
=UNLMITED)00
LIST
4.
LTIPLICATION?
5-FUNCTIONS
WITH DONE?
Y
6.
NO LINK)
PRESS
FUNCTION
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
PRESS [DELETE]
CONDIMENTS
1 CATSUP
2 MUSTARD
3 ONION
4 PICKLE
5 RELISH
N
6 MAYO
7 00BUTTER
8 GARLIC
   ENT
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Viewing PLU Numbers or Descriptors on a WLU
When you are selecting PLUs from the PLU list, you may find it more convenient to search
for the PLU # rather than the PLU descriptor. You can change the view of PLUs on a WLU
from PLU descriptors to PLU numbers by alternately pressing the   keys.
1. Press  to
change the view
of the WLU from
PLU descriptors
to PLU numbers.
2. Press  to return
the WLU view to
PLU descriptors.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU OR
CONDIMENTS
1. TITLE :
CONDIMENT ENTER
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS 1
N
# AND
[PLU]
P#00000000000136 N
ALLOW
PLU OR
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
2
N
[PLU]TO
VIEW
P#00000000000138
3. # OF CONDI)00
LIST
3
4.
CONDIMENT ION?
N
5-FUNCTIONS
ALLOW EXITE WITH DONE?
Y
P#00000000000140
6.
LINK FUNCTION
TO WL LINK) 4
00
PRESS
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
P#00000000000141
5
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  173
Deleting Items From a WLU
1. To delete an item,
press  or  to select
the item to delete.
Press DELETE or
VOID ITEM to
delete the item.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU OR
CONDIMENTS
1. TITLE :
CONDIMENT
ENTER
1
CATSUP
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
# AND
[PLU]
2 MUSTARD
ALLOW
PLU OR
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
3 ONION
[PLU]TO
VIEW
4 PICKLE
3.
# OF CONDTED)00
LIST
4.
CONDIMENTATION?
5 RELISHN
5
ALLOW EXILE WITH DONE?
-FUNCTIONS
6 MAYO Y
6.
LINKFUNCTION
TO W LINK)
PRESS
7 BUTTER00
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMS
TO VIEW
A
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
N
N
N
8 GARLIC
   ENT
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
2. Note that items are
automatically shifted
up to fill the space the
deleted item
occupied.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU OR
1. TITLE :
CONDIMENT ENTER
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
# AND
[PLU]
ALLOW
PLU OR
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3.
# OF CONDIME)00
LIST
4.
CONDIMENT MUN?
5-FUNCTIONS
ALLOW EXIT FONE?
6.
LINK FUNCTION
TO WLU#NK)
PRESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
CONDIMENTS
CATSUP
MUSTARD
ONION
RELISH
MAYO N
Y
BUTTER
GARLIC00
   ENT
N
N
N
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Add an Item In a Specific Position Within a WLU
1. To add an item in a
different position
within the list, move
the cursor to the
position above where
you wish to insert the
item.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU OR
1. TITLE :
CONDIMENT
ENTER
2.
ALLOW CONDIMENTS
# AND
[PLU]
ALLOW PLU OR
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3. # OF CONDIMEN00
LIST
4.
CONDIMENT MUL?
5-FUNCTIONS
ALLOW EXIT FRNE?
6.
LINK FUNCTION
TO WLU# NK)
PRESS
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CONDIMENTS
CATSUP
MUSTARD
ONION
RELISH
MAYO N
Y
BUTTER
GARLIC 00
   ENT
N
N
N
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
174  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
2. Add a new PLU or
condiment.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
CONDIMENTS
-PLU
OR
1. TITLE :
1 CATSUP
CONDIMENT
ENTER
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
2 MUSTARD
# AND
[PLU]
ALLOW
PLU OR
3 ONION
PLUALLOW
KEY OR
FUNCTIONS
4 PICKLE
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3. (0=UNLMITED)00
5 RELISH
LIST
4. TIPLICATION?
N
6 MAYO Y
5
FROM TABLE WITH DONE?
-FUNCTIONS
6. LU# FUNCTION
(0=NO LINK)
7 BUTTER00
PRESS
8 GARLIC
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMS
TO VIEW A
   ENT
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Move the cursor to
the end of the list
where you can
continue adding items
to the end of the
WLU list.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
CONDIMENTS
CATSUP
MUSTARD
ONION
PICKLE
RELISH
N
MAYO
00
BUTTER
8 GARLIC
   ENT
-PLU
OR :
1.
TITLE
1
CONDIMENT
ENTER
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
2
# AND
[PLU]
OR
ALLOW PLU
3
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
4
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3.
(0=UNLMITED)00
5
4.
TIPLICATION?
LIST
5-FUNCTIONS
LE WITH DONE?
Y6
6.
# (0=NO
LINK)
7
PRESS
FUNCTION
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
N
N
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
WLUs with More Than 10 Items
1. Add items until the
WLU window is full
with 10 items.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
CONDIMENTS
CATSUP
N
MUSTARD
N
ONION
N
PICKLE
RELISH
MAYO
BUTTER
8 GARLIC
9 HOT SAUCE
10 MILD SAUCE
   ENT
-PLU
OR :
1.
TITLE
1
CONDIMENT
ENTER
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
2
# AND
[PLU]
OR
ALLOW PLU
3
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
4
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3ES
(0=UNLMITED)00
5
4N?
N
LIST
5ABLE
WITH DONE?
Y6
-FUNCTIONS
6=NO
00
7
PRESSLINK)
FUNCTION
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  175
Scroll indicator shows that
another page of items is
before this page.
2. When the 11th item is
added to the WLU,
the item displays at
the top of a second
page of WLU items.
3. If it is necessary to
view or edit the
previous page of the
WLU, press PAGE
UP.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU OR
1. TITLE :
CONDIMENT ENTER
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
# AND
[PLU]
ALLOW
PLU OR
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3. # OF ITEM
LIST
4.
CONDIMENT MUL
5-FUNCTIONS
ALLOW EXIT FR
6.
LINK FUNCTION
TO WLU#
PRESS
CONDIMENTS
11 TOMATO

   ENT
N
N
N
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
[
]
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
176  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Adding Functions to a WLU
1. To add functions to
the WLU, press the
function you wish to
add or press ESC to
view a function list.
NOTE: ALLOW
FUNCTIONS must be
set to Y (yes) on the
WLU programming
window to allow
functions to be included
in the WLU.
2. Press ESC. The
FUNCTION LIST
displays.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU OR
1.
TITLE : ENTER
CONDIMENT
2.
ALLOW
CONDIMENTS
# AND
[PLU]
OR
ALLOW PLU
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3.
# OF ITEM
LIST
4.
CONDIMENT
5-FUNCTIONS
ALLOW EXIT FROM
PRESS
6.
LINKFUNCTION
TO
CONDIMENTS
11 TOMATO
12 HOT DOG

   ENT
N
N
N
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
[
]
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION LIST
1. TITLE :
NUMERIC
1
2.
ALLOW CONDIMENTS
N
NUMERIC
2
ALLOW PLU
N
NUMERIC
3
ALLOW FUNCTIONS
N
NUMERIC
4
3. # OF CONDIMENT
CHOICES (0=UNLMITED)00
NUMERIC
5
4.
CONDIMENT
MULTIPLICATION?
N
NUMERIC
6
5 ALLOW EXIT
FROM TABLE WITH DONE?
Y
NUMERIC
6.
LINK TO7 WLU# (0=NO LINK)
00
NUMERIC 8
NUMERIC
EDIT
ITEMS9
NUMERIC 0
NUMERIC 00

SPS 1000 Program Manual
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  177
3. Add a function to the
WLU list by selecting
it on the FUNCTION
LIST window.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION LIST
1. TITLE :
CASH
2.
ALLOW CONDIMENTS
N
CSHALLOW
TIP PLU
DEC
N
CHGALLOW
TIP FUNCTIONS
DEC
N
CHECK
3.
# OF CONDIMENT CHOICES (0=UNLMITED)00
CHECK
CASH MULTIPLICATION?
4.
CONDIMENT
N
CHECK
5 ALLOWENDORSE
EXIT FROM TABLE WITH DONE?
Y
CLEAR
6.
LINK TO WLU# (0=NO LINK)
00
CONTINUE
CURR.
CONV. 1
EDIT
ITEMS
CURR. CONV. 2
CURR. CONV. 3

ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 

4. Press ENTER. The
updated WLU
displays. Delete
items and edit the
WLU in the same
manner as you would
delete PLUs or
condiments.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
-PLU
OR :
1.
TITLE
CONDIMENT
ENTER
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
# AND
ALLOW[PLU]
PLU OR
PLUALLOW
KEY FUNCTIONS
OR
[PLU]TO
VIEW
3.
# OF CONDIMENT0
4.
CONDIMENT
LIST
5-FUNCTIONS
ALLOW EXIT
6.
LINK FUNCTION
PRESS
CONDIMENTS
11 TOMATO
12 HOT DOG
CURR. CONV. 1

   ENT
N
N
N
OR PRESS [ESC]
EDIT
ITEMSA
TO VIEW
FUNCTION LIST
-DELETE ITEM
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Exiting WLU Edit Items
1. Press DONE to exit
the EDIT ITEMS
window.
2. Continue to program
WLUs as necessary
or press ESC to
return to the PMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU.
WLU#01 PROGRAMMING
1. TITLE :
2. ALLOW CONDIMENTS
ALLOW PLU
ALLOW FUNCTIONS
3. # OF ITEM CHOICES (0=UNLMITD)
4. CONDIMENT MULTIPLICATION?
5 ALLOW EXIT FROM TABLE WITH DONE?
6. LINK TO WLU# (0=NO LINK)
N
N
N
00
N
Y
00
EDIT ITEMS 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
178  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Time Period
Memory allocation determines whether there are 24, 48, or 96 time periods. Time periods
will default to hourly periods if 24 periods are selected in memory allocation; 30-minute
periods if 48 periods are selected; 15-minute periods if 96 periods are selected.
Periods can be set to custom lengths using this program. If fewer periods are needed than are
available, unneeded periods can be inactivated so that they will not appear on reports. To
inactivate a period, replace the "Y" (active) for the period with an "N" (inactive).
All time units are based upon a 24-hour clock (military time).
1. Select TIME
PERIOD from the PMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
TIME PERIOD
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Press the    
keys to select a field
to edit.
3. Type new
information into the
field, press ENTER.
TIME PERIOD PROGRAMMING
# OF PERIODS SET IN MEMORY: 24
1. (Y) 00:00-00:59
13 (Y) 12:00-12:59
2. (Y) 01:00-01:59
14 (Y) 13:00-13:59
3. (Y) 02:00-02:59
15 (Y) 14:00-14:59
4. (Y) 03:00-03:59
16 (Y) 15:00-15:59
5. (Y) 04:00-04:59
17 (Y) 16:00-16:59
6. (Y) 05:00-05:59
18 (Y) 17:00-17:59
7. (Y) 06:00-06:59
19 (Y) 18:00-18:59
8. (Y) 07:00-07:59
20 (Y) 19:00-19:59
9. (Y) 08:00-08:59
21 (Y) 20:00-20:59
10. (Y) 09:00-09:59
22 (Y) 21:00-21:59
11. (Y) 10:00-10:59
23 (Y) 22:00-22:59
12. (Y) 11:00-11:59
24 (Y) 23:00-23:59
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
4. Press ESC to exit the
TIME PERIOD
PROGRAMMING
screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  179
Employee
The employee file contains information for register operators as well as employees who use
the register only to clock in or out (employee time keeping.) Specific functions that are
allowed or disallowed for each employee are determined by assigning the employee to an
authority level. (See "Authority Level" on page 186.)
Two 10 digit code numbers may be assigned for each employee. A time keeping code is used
to clock in or out and a separate sign on code used to operate the register. The social security
number is for reference only and appears only on reports.
The total number of employees (up to 999) is set in memory allocation. See "Memory
Allocation" in "S-Mode Programming".
1. Select EMPLOYEE
from the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
EMPLOYEE#
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Type the
EMPLOYEE number
and press ENTER, or
press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN to scroll
to the Employee you
wish to program.
EMPLOYEE#01 PROGRAMMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAME
EMPLOYEE1
SOCIAL SEC #
000-00-0000
CLOCK IN CODE
0000000000
OPERATING CODE
0000000000
LINK TO AUTHORITY LEVEL
1
JOB1 JOB2 JOB3 JOB4 JOB5 JOB6
6. JOB CODE# 00
00
00
00
00
00
7. PAY RATE# 00
00
00
00
00
00
8. OPEN DRAWER# (0-3)
0
9. TRAINING MODE?
N
EDIT JOB CODES 
EDIT PAY RATES 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press the    
keys to select a field
to edit.
4. Enter the appropriate
value using numeric
keys. Values that are
not allowed will not
be accepted.
5. Press ESC to exit the
EMPLOYEE
PROGRAMMING
screen.
180  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Employee Program Notes
#
Field
Notes
3
CLOCK IN CODE
Enter a number (up to 10 digits in length) that
will be used by this employee to clock in
and/or out.
4
OPERATING CODE
Enter the secret code number (up to 10 digits
in length) that can be used to sign in/out.
Note that system option # 21 "EMPLOYEE
SIGN-ON" must be set to "SECRET CODE"
to use this number. See "General Function
Options" on page 116.
5
LINK TO AUTHORITY LEVEL
Operations and programs that can be accessed
by this employee are determined by selecting
a authority level here. See "Authority Levels"
on page 186 to define specific operations for
each of 9 levels.
6
7
JOB CODE#
PAY RATE#
An employee might have more than one job,
possibly with a different pay rate for each job.
For example, in a restaurant, an employee
might work as a server one day, and on a
different day or shift, work as a cashier.
By assigning separate job codes and pay rates
for each employee, the built in time clock can
track and report hours and wage costs
appropriately.
See "Edit Job Codes" on page 182 and "Edit
Pay Rates" on page 184 to set up the job
codes and pay rates you need to use.
See "Time Clock Procedures" in the SPS 1000
Operation Manual for instructions on
clocking on/off for different jobs. Note that
the job code you assign for JOB1 is the
default job code for clocking in/out.
8
OPEN DRAWER# (0-3)
If drawer 0 is assigned, the employee can only
perform check track postings (not payments).
9
TRAINING MODE?
If Y, this employee will be in training,
regardless of the training mode status of the
entire register.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  181
Edit Job Codes
Note: An employee with the appropriate authority level must be signed on to perform
job code programming.
Job codes are used to break down the hours worked for all employees into different categories
(See "Labor Groups" report in the Operation Manual.) A breakdown of hours by job is also
reported for each employee (See "Time Keeping" reports in the Operation Manual.)
The job codes to be used by all employees are set up here. There are 20 possible job codes.
Each job code you wish to activate must be given a descriptor here.
1. From any employee
record screen, use the
CURSOR keys to
select EDIT JOB
CODES.
EMPLOYEE#01 PROGRAMMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAME
EMPLOYEE1
SOCIAL SEC #
000-00-0000
CLOCK IN CODE
0000000000
OPERATING CODE
0000000000
LINK TO AUTHORITY LEVEL
1
JOB1 JOB2 JOB3 JOB4 JOB5 JOB6
6. JOB CODE# 00
00
00
00
00
00
7. PAY RATE# 00
00
00
00
00
00
8. OPEN DRAWER# (0-3)
0
9. TRAINING MODE?
N
EDIT JOB CODES 
EDIT PAY RATES 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
182  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
JOB CODE PROGRAMMING
2. Press ENTER to
display the JOB
CODE
PROGRAMMING
screen.
3. Up to twenty job
codes can be
programmed. Enter a
descriptor to activate
the associated job
code#. Press PAGE
UP or PAGE DN or
press the     to
position the cursor for
programming
descriptors.
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB

CODE1
CODE2
CODE3
CODE4
CODE5
CODE6
CODE7
CODE8
CODE9
CODE10
CODE11
CODE12
ALPHA
JOB#1
JOB#2
JOB#3
JOB#4
JOB#5
JOB#6
JOB#7
JOB#8
JOB#9
JOB#10
JOB#11
JOB#12
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
4. Press ENTER to
finalize the descriptor
entry and move to the
next job code
descriptor field.
5. Continue to program
job codes or press
ESC to exit and
return to the
appropriate
EMPLOYEE #
PROGRAMMING
screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  183
Edit Pay Rates
Note: An employee with the appropriate authority level must be signed on to perform
pay rate programming.
The pay rates to be used by all employees are set up here. There are 50 pay rates.
1. From any employee
record screen, press
the  or  keys to
select EDIT PAY
RATES.
EMPLOYEE#01 PROGRAMMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAME
EMPLOYEE1
SOCIAL SEC #
000-00-0000
CLOCK IN CODE
0000000000
OPERATING CODE
0000000000
LINK TO AUTHORITY LEVEL
1
JOB1 JOB2 JOB3 JOB4 JOB5 JOB6
6. JOB CODE# 00
00
00
00
00
00
7. PAY RATE# 00
00
00
00
00
00
8. OPEN DRAWER# (0-3)
0
9. TRAINING MODE?
N
EDIT JOB CODES 
EDIT PAY RATES 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
184  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PAY RATE PROGRAMMING
2. Press ENTER to
display pay rate
PROGRAMMING
screen.
3. Up to fifty pay rates
can be programmed.
Enter an amount to
activate the
associated pay rate#.
Press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN or press
the     to
position the cursor for
programming rates.
PAY
PAY
PAY
PAY
PAY
PAY
PAY
PAY
PAY
PAY
PAY
PAY

RATE1
RATE2
RATE3
RATE4
RATE5
RATE6
RATE7
RATE8
RATE9
RATE10
RATE11
RATE12
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
4. Press ENTER to
finalize the rate entry
and move to the next
job code descriptor
field.
5. Continue to program
pay rates or press
ESC to exit and
return to the
appropriate
EMPLOYEE #
PROGRAMMING
screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  185
Authority Levels
Each employee must be assigned to one of nine authority levels. See "Employee" on page
180 to assign an employee to an authority level. The selections made here for each authority
level determine the operations that are allowed for each employee.
For example, in a restaurant an authority level with the descriptor kitchen help could be set to
allow only clocking in/out, or an authority level with the descriptor owner could be set up to
allow all functions. Other authority levels could be defined for servers, cashiers and
managers that allow only the appropriate functions.
1. Select AUTHORITY
LEVELS from the PMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Press the    
keys, PAGE UP or
PAGE DN to select
the appropriate level
and option. (Note
that there are 4 pages
of authority level
options.)
3. Press the Y/N key to
toggle from yes to no.
4. Continue to select and
change options as
necessary. Press
ESC to return to the
P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
menu.
AUTHORITY LEVEL PROGRAMMING
ALPHA DESCRIPTORS 
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
AUTHORITY LEVEL : 123456789
CLOCK-IN/OUT ENTRY ONLY?
NNNNNNNNN
MUST CLOCK-IN BEFORE SALES?NNNNNNNNN
CAN CLOCK-OUT IF OPEN CHKS?NNNNNNNNN
GUEST CHECK ENTRIES ONLY? NNNNNNNNN
GUEST# ENTRY ON NEW CHECKS?NNNNNNNNN
PAYMENT OF OWN GUEST CHECK?NNNNNNNNN
PAYMENT OF ANY GUEST CHECK?NNNNNNNNN
TRANSFER OF GUEST CHECKS? NNNNNNNNN
VOIDING OF SERVICED ITEMS? NNNNNNNNN

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
AUTHORITY LEVEL PROGRAMMING
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.

186  P-Mode Programming
AUTHORITY LEVEL : 123456789
ALLOW CANCEL AFTER RECALL? NNNNNNNNN
CLOCK IN/OUT USING MCR?
NNNNNNNNN
SIGN IN/OUT USING MCR?
NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW EDIT ANY CHECKS?
NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW DESTINATION CHANGE? NNNNNNNNN
CAN COMBINE OWN SOFT CHKS? NNNNNNNNN
CAN COMBINE ANY SOFT CHKS? NNNNNNNNN
TABLE # TRANSFER IN R-MODE?NNNNNNNNN
CAN PLU PRC/HALO OVERRIDE? NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW SET DATE AND TIME?
NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW TIME CLOCK EDIT?
NNNNNNNNN
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
AUTHORITY LEVEL PROGRAMMING
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.

AUTHORITY LEVEL : 123456789
ALLOW CASH DECLARATION?
NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW K/B AND PRICE LEVEL? NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW EMPLOYEE FILE EDIT? NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW PRINT & RESET OF E.J?NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW JOB CODE EDIT?
NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW PAY RATE EDIT?
NNNNNNNNN
CAN INVENTORY EDIT X MODE? NNNNNNNNN
CAN INVENTORY EDIT P MODE? NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW AUTHORITY LEVEL EDIT?YYYYYYYYY
COMP SEAT# FOR EACH ENTRY? NNNNNNNNN
ENABLE TRAINING MODE?
NNNNNNNNN
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
AUTHORITY LEVEL PROGRAMMING
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.

SPS 1000 Program Manual
AUTHORITY LEVEL : 123456789
ALLOW WLU FILE EDITS?
NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW NO SALE?
NNNNNNNNN
PAID BREAKS?
NNNNNNNNN
COMPULSORY JOB CODE ENTRY? NNNNNNNNN
MANAGER REQ. FOR CLOCK IN? NNNNNNNNN
COMPULSORY TIP ENTRY?
NNNNNNNNN
JOB CODE CHANGE?
NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW PLU PRC CHANGE ONLY? NNNNNNNNN
ALLOW X MODE EDIT PLU STOCKNNNNNNNNN
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  187
Authority Level Program Notes
#
FIELD
Notes
14
ALLOW DESTINATION
CHANGE?
If Y is set here, the operator has the option of
selecting a destination (i.e. eat-in, take out,
drive thru) other than the default.
30
COMP SEAT# FOR EACH
ENTRY
If seat # is implemented, and is not
compulsory here, each item will default to
seat "01".
35
COMPULSORY JOB CODE
ENTRY?
If Y, a job code must be selected at clock in.
If N, clock in will default to the first job code
for the employee.
37
COMPULSORY TIP ENTRY?
If Y, the employee is prompted to declare tips
when clocking out.
38
JOB CODE CHANGE?
If N, the employee can clock on using only
the default job code; if Y, the employee can
select of the job code displayed at clock in.
39
ALLOW PLU PRICE CHANGE
ONLY?
If Y, the employee can access the PLU
programming screen, but can edit only the
PRICE/HALO and PRICE LEVEL fields.
40
ALLOW X MODE EDIT PLU
STOCK
If Y, the employee will be allowed to perform
PLU stock edits in X mode.
188  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Authority Level Alpha Descriptors
1. Select AUTHORITY
LEVELS from the PMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PROGRAMMING
Screen.
AUTHORITY LEVEL PROGRAMMING
ALPHA DESCRIPTORS 
AUTHORITY LEVEL:123456789
CLOCK-IN/OUT ENTRY ONLY?
YNNNNNNNN
MUST CLOCK-IN BEFORE SALES?
YNNNNNNNN
CAN CLOCK-OUT IF OPEN CHECKS? NNNNNNNNN
GUEST CHECK ENTRIES ONLY?
YNNNNNNNN
GUEST# ENTRY ON NEW CHECKS?
YNNNNNNNN
PAYMENT OF OWN GUEST CHECK?
YNNNNNNNN
PAYMENT OF ANY GUEST CHECK?
YNNNNNNNN
TRANSFER OF GUEST CHECKS?
NNNNNNNNN
VOIDING OF SERVICED ITEMS?
NNNNNNNNN

2. Press ENTER to
display the
AUTHORITY
LEVEL ALPHA
DESCRIPTORS
screen.
3. Press the  or  keys
to select a descriptor
field to edit.
4. Enter a descriptor.
Press ENTER to
finalize the entry and
move to the next
authority level
descriptor field.
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
AUTHORITY LEVEL DESCRIPTION
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ALPHA
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
5. Continue to program
descriptors or press
ESC to exit and
return to the
AUTHORITY
LEVEL
PROGRAMMING
screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  189
Printer Tables & KV Routing
The printing system of an SPS 1000 register or system of registers is completely flexible. Up
to 40 printers can be defined and connected to any available serial port on any register within
a system. Multiple printer functions can be assigned to the same printer, giving added
flexibility.
1. Before programming here, you must first:

See "Serial Port Device Selections" in S-Mode Programming to define the type of
device (i.e. printer or kitchen video) that is connected to a serial port.

See "Define Serial Port Parameters" in S-Mode Programming to match the baud
rate/parity/etc. between the serial port and the printer. This program also controls the
feed lines before and after printing, the logo size, and cutting options.

See "Printer Driver Selections" if you are using a printer other than the printers with
predefined drivers, or if you need to customize a driver for a printer.
2. Next, assign a port for each printer. See "System Printer Routing" on page 192 to assign
printer number (1-40), give it a 10 character descriptor (i.e. salad prep, receipt, or detail)
and identify the port # and the register # to which it is attached. In addition, you can
identify a back-up location for information designated to go to the printer. (For example,
if the salad printer is not functioning, then information destined for that printer could be
sent to a different printer.)
3. Finally, proceed with the parts of this program that pertain to your application:

If you are using a kitchen video, see "Kitchen Video Routing" on page 194 to
designate the port # and the register # where the video controller is attached. You
can also define a backup printer in case communication with the video controller is
disrupted.

If you are using kitchen printers, see "Kitchen Printer Routing" on page 195 to link
kitchen printer groups with a printer. (The groups of items are defined by assigning
PLU items to PLU Status groups where groups are identified.)
Because it is sometimes necessary to change kitchen printer routing depending upon
the time of the day, (for example, separate hot and cold food kitchens may be active
during lunch and a single kitchen active during dinner) you can make assignments for
four different periods. The active routing period can be controlled automatically by
time or set manually.

If you are using receipt printers, see "Kitchen Printer Routing" on page 195 to set the
receipt printer for each location.

If you are using detail printers, see "Detail Printer Routing" on page 199 to designate
the journal printer for each location.
190  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
1. Select PRINTER
TABLES & KV
ROUTING from the
P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PRINTER & KV
ROUTING MENU
screen.
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
PRINTER & KV ROUTING MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SYSTEM PRINTER CONFIGURATION
KITCHEN VIDEO ROUTING
KITCHEN PRINTER ROUTING
RECEIPT PRINTER ROUTING
DETAIL PRINTER ROUTING
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and
press ENTER.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  191
System Printer Routing
Use System Printer Routing to define the locations within the system for up to 40 possible
system printers.
1. Select SYSTEM
PRINTER ROUTING
from the PRINTER
ROUTING MENU to
display the SYSTEM
PRINTER ROUTING
screen. The
selections for the first
of 10 possible
printers display.
SYSTEM PRINTER CONFIGURATION
ALPHA
MAIN
BACK-UP
PRINTER DESCRIPTOR REG#-PORT# REG#-PORT#
# 1
# 2
# 3
# 4
# 5
# 6
# 7
# 8
# 9
#10

2. If necessary, press
PAGE DN to view or
change location
assignments for
different printers.
3. Press     to
select the field you
wish to edit. Type
new information and
press ENTER.
4. Press ESC to return
to the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU
192  P-Mode Programming
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SYSTEM PRINTER CONFIGURATION
ALPHA
MAIN
BACK-UP
PRINTER DESCRIPTOR REG#-PORT# REG#-PORT#
#11
#12
#13
#14
#15
#16
#17
#18
#19
#20

00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
SYSTEM PRINTER CONFIGURATION
ALPHA
MAIN
BACK-UP
PRINTER DESCRIPTOR REG#-PORT# REG#-PORT#
#21
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
#27
#28
#29
#30

00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SYSTEM PRINTER CONFIGURATION
ALPHA
MAIN
BACK-UP
PRINTER DESCRIPTOR REG#-PORT# REG#-PORT#
#31
#32
#33
#34
#35
#36
#37
#38
#39
#40

SPS 1000 Program Manual
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
00-0
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  193
Kitchen Video Routing
Use Kitchen Video Routing to define the location of the video controller. If you wish to
designate a backup printer in the event that the video system is not operational, enter the
location of the back-up printer here.
1. Select KITCHEN
VIDEO ROUTING
from the PRINTER
ROUTING MENU to
display the
KITCHEN VIDEO
ROUTING screen.
2. Press     to
select the field you
wish to edit. Type
new information and
press ENTER.
KITCHEN VIDEO ROUTING
VIDEO#
#1
ALPHA
MAIN
BACKUP
DESCRIPTOR REG#-PORT# REG#-PORT#
00-0
00-0
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press ESC to return
to the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU
194  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Kitchen Printer Routing
Use Kitchen Printer Routing to link the kitchen printer assignment made to items with actual
printers. (See "PLU Status Group" on page 39 to link a group of PLUs to a printer
assignment number.)

Because different registers might route kitchen printer items to different printers,
each register can be programmed separately in this program. (see "Kitchen
Printing/Video Options" (option #11) on page 133 to allow separate routing by
register.) All registers contain routing information for all of the registers in the
system.
NOTE: All registers are updated with changes made to this program at any
register.

Because it is sometimes necessary to change kitchen printer routing depending upon
the time of the day, (for example, separate hot and cold food kitchens may be active
during lunch and a single kitchen active during dinner) you can make assignments for
four different periods. The active routing period can be controlled automatically by
time or set manually.

Priority printing is also controlled with this program. The order in which items are
printed on the kitchen printer ticket is determined by the order in which kitchen
printer groups are listed for each printer #. (Groups at the left are printed first;
groups at the right are printed last.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  195
1. Select KITCHEN
PRINTER ROUTING
from the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
KITCHEN PRINTER
ROUTING PERIOD #1 screen.
2. Enter a REG# (1-40)
and press ENTER, or
press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN until the
REG# you wish to
program is selected.
3. Press     to
select the field you
wish to edit. Type
new information and
press ENTER.
4. If necessary, press
PAGE DN to view or
change routing for
periods 2, 3, and/or 4.
5. Press ESC to exit the
KITCHEN PRINTER
ROUTING screen.
REG#01 KITCHEN PRINTER ROUTING
PT DESCRIPTOR KP KP KP KP KP KP KP KP KP
#
# # # # # # # # #
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESC Y/N
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
ENTER
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
PAGE UP/DN 
Note: The Descriptor field is filled automatically when a
printer number is selected. Printer numbers and
descriptors are defined in "System Printer Routing" on
page 192.
REG#01 KITCHEN PRINTER ROUTING
PERIOD#2
PT DESCRIPTOR KP KP KP KP KP KP KP KP KP
#
# # # # # # # # #
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

196  P-Mode Programming
PERIOD#1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESC Y/N
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
ENTER
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
REG#01 KITCHEN PRINTER ROUTING
PERIOD#3
PT DESCRIPTOR KP KP KP KP KP KP KP KP KP
#
# # # # # # # # #
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESC Y/N
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
ENTER
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
PAGE UP/DN 
REG#01 KITCHEN PRINTER ROUTING
PERIOD#4
PT DESCRIPTOR KP KP KP KP KP KP KP KP KP
#
# # # # # # # # #
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

SPS 1000 Program Manual
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESC Y/N
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
ENTER
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  197
Receipt Printer Routing
1. Select RECEIPT
PRINTER ROUTING
from the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
RECEIPT PRINTER
ROUTING screen.
2. Press     to
select the field you
wish to edit. Type
new information and
press ENTER.
3. If necessary, press
PAGE DN to view or
change routing for as
many additional
registers are defined
in the system.
RECEIPT PRINTER ROUTING
REGISTER# PRINTER# REGISTER# PRINTER#
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
RECEIPT PRINTER ROUTING
REGISTER# PRINTER# REGISTER# PRINTER#
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

198  P-Mode Programming
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Detail Printer Routing
1. Select DETAIL
PRINTER ROUTING
from the S-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
DETAIL PRINTER
ROUTING screen.
2. Press     to
select the field you
wish to edit. Type
new information and
press ENTER.
3. If necessary, press
PAGE DN to view or
change routing for as
many additional
registers are defined
in the system.
DETAIL PRINTER ROUTING
REGISTER# PRINTER# REGISTER# PRINTER#
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
DETAIL PRINTER ROUTING
REGISTER# PRINTER# REGISTER# PRINTER#
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

SPS 1000 Program Manual
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  199
Ingredient Inventory
A menu-explosion type inventory system is set up when PLUs are linked to a recipe# (see
"PLU Status Group" on page 39.) Select INGREDIENT INVENTORY from the P-Mode
Programming Menu to maintain recipe files and ingredient lists. Select EDIT INVENTORY
ITEM from the X-MODE MANAGER MENU (see the SPS 1000 Operation Manual) to
receive, transfer in/out, or enter raw waste for ingredients in this system.
NOTE: Be careful not to confuse the separate and distinct inventory features of the SPS
1000:
 Recipes and Ingredients (described here.)
 Product Mix Groups (see “Product Mix Groups” on page 215.)
 PLU Stock (see “PLU Stock” on page225),
1. Select INGREDIENT
INVENTORY from
the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
INGREDIENT
INVENTORY
MENU screen.
INGREDIENT INVENTORY MENU
1.
2.
EDIT INGREDIENT
RECIPE TABLE
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and
press ENTER.
200  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Edit Ingredient
1. Select EDIT
INGREDIENT from
the INGREDIENT
INVENTORY
MENU to display the
INGREDIENT
PROGRAMMING
screen. The cursor is
positioned at the next
available ingredient.
INGREDIENT PROGRAMMING
INGREDIENT#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
2. Add or edit
ingredients by

moving the cursor to
a field and filling in
information according
to the table below.
ALPHA
DESCRIPTOR
COST
000.000
000.000
000.000
000.000
000.000
000.000
000.000
000.000
000.000
000.000
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press ESC to return
to the INGREDIENT
INVENTORY
MENU
Ingredient Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
INGREDIENT#
This field is the three-digit inventory number. The value
begins at 001 and goes up to the maximum number that is
assigned in memory allocation.
DESCRIPTOR
A 12-digit descriptor is set for the inventory item. (An
inventory item is an “ingredient” of a PLU.)
COST
The cost of the item is the cost of the ingredient. The cost can
be entered accurate to three places after the decimal.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  201
Recipe Table
1. Select RECIPE
TABLE from the
INGREDIENT
INVENTORY
MENU to display the
RECIPE #
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Enter a RECIPE and
press ENTER, or
press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN until the
RECIPE you wish to
program is selected.
RECIPE # 1 PROGRAMMING
ING/RECIPE
#
DESCRIPTOR
QTY
00
000
INGREDIENT 
00
000
INGREDIENT 
00
000
INGREDIENT 
00
000
INGREDIENT 
00
000
INGREDIENT 
00
000
INGREDIENT 
00
000
INGREDIENT 
INGREDIENT 
00
000
00
000
INGREDIENT 
00
000
INGREDIENT 

ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
3. Add or edit recipe
components by
moving the cursor to
a field and filling
information according
to the table below.
4. Press ESC to return
to the INGREDIENT
INVENTORY
MENU.
202  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Recipe Table Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
ING/RECIPE
Choose whether this line corresponds to an INGredient or a
RECIPE. (A recipe may be composed of recipes. For
example, a special sauce (a recipe) may be an ingredient of a
sandwich recipe.)
#
Enter the 3-digit number of the recipe or ingredient.
DESCRIPTOR
Display only. When a recipe or ingredient number is entered,
the corresponding descriptor displays.
QTY
Enter the amount of inventory items used in the recipe, i.e. 1
patty for a regular hamburger, or 2 patties for double
hamburger.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  203
Time Activated Functions
1. Select TIME
ACTIVATED
FUNCTIONS from
the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
TIME ACTIVATED
FUNCTIONS MENU
screen.
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
TIME ACTIVATED FUNCTIONS MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
KEYBOARD LEVELS
PRICE LEVELS
MACROS
STRING REPORTS
SHIFTS
KP TIME PERIOD
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and
press ENTER.
204  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Time Activated Keyboard Levels
1. Select KEYBOARD
LEVELS from the
TIME ACTIVATED
FUNCTIONS MENU
to display the TIME
ACTIVATED
KEYBOARD
LEVEL screen.
2. Enter a level and
press ENTER, or
press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN until the
level you wish to
program is selected.
TIME ACTIVATED KEYBOARD LEVEL#1
ACTIVATE AT: (99:99 = DISABLED)
99:99
WEEK : SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Refer to “Time
Activate Keyboard
Levels Program
Notes” on the
following page for
information about
filling fields.
4. Press ESC at any
point to exit the
TIME ACTIVATE
KEYBOARD
LEVELS screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  205
Time Activate Keyboard Levels Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
ACTIVATE AT
Enter the time (24 hour/military time) you wish the keyboard
level to activate. Enter 99:99 to inactivate the keyboard level
changes.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
Press the Y/N key at each day of the week field to select
which days the keyboard level change is to occur.
206  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Time Activated Price Levels
1. Select PRICE
LEVELS from the
TIME ACTIVATED
FUNCTIONS MENU
to display the TIME
ACTIVATED PRICE
LEVEL screen.
2. Enter a level and
press ENTER, or
press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN until the
level you wish to
program is selected.
TIME ACTIVATED PRICE LEVEL#1
ACTIVATE AT: (99:99 = DISABLED)
99:99
WEEK : SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Refer to “Time
Activate Price Levels
Program Notes”
below for information
about filling fields.
4. Press ESC at any
point to exit the
PRICE LEVEL
screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  207
Time Activate Price Levels Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
ACTIVATE AT
Enter the time (24 hour/military time) you wish the price level
program to activate. Enter 99:99 to inactivate the price level
program.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
Press the Y/N key at each day of the week field to select
which days the price level program is to occur.
208  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Time Activated Macros
1. Select MACROS
from the TIME
ACTIVATED
FUNCTIONS MENU
to display the TIME
ACTIVATED
MACROS screen.
2. Type a macro number
and press ENTER, or
press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN until the
macro you wish to
program is selected.
TIME ACTIVATED MACRO#1
ACTIVATE AT: (99:99 = DISABLED)
99:99
REPEAT EVERY MINUTES(0 = NO REPEAT)
0
WEEK : SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Refer to “Time
Activate Macro
Program Notes” on
the following page
for information about
filling fields.
4. Press ESC at any
point to exit the
TIME ACTIVATED
MACRO screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  209
Time Activate Macro Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
ACTIVATE AT
Enter the time (24 hour/military time) you wish the macro to
activate. Enter 99:99 to inactivate the macro.
REPEAT EVERY
MINUTES
If you wish the macro to repeat, enter the interval in minutes,
i.e. 60 to repeat every sixty minutes.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
Press the Y/N key at each day of the week field to select
which days the macro is to occur.
210  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Time Activated String Reports
1. Select STRING
REPORTS from the
TIME ACTIVATED
FUNCTIONS MENU
to display the TIME
ACTIVATED
STRING REPORTS
screen.
2. Enter string report #
and press ENTER, or
press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN until the
string report you wish
to program is
selected.
TIME ACTIVATED STRING REPORT#1
ACTIVATE AT: (99:99 = DISABLED)
99:99
REPEAT EVERY MINUTES(0 = NO REPEAT)
0
WEEK : SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
IRC OPTION :
STANDALONE 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Refer to “Time
Activate String
Report Program
Notes” on the
following page for
information about
filling fields.
4. Press ESC at any
point to exit the
TIME ACTIVATE
STRING REPORT
screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  211
Time Activate String Report Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
ACTIVATE AT
Enter the time (24 hour/military time) you wish the string
report to activate. Enter 99:99 to inactivate the string report.
REPEAT EVERY
MINUTES
If you wish the report to repeat, enter the interval in minutes,
i.e. 60 to repeat every sixty minutes.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
Press the Y/N key at each day of the week field to select
which days the string report is to occur.
IRC OPTION
Select the IRC OPTION field and press ENTER. Choose
STANDALONE or IRC ALL from the pop-up window.
212  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Time Activated Shifts
Shift time programming determines the times of day financial totals are accumulated for the
Shift Report.
1. Select SHIFTS from
the TIME
ACTIVATED
FUNCTIONS MENU
to display the SHIFT
TIME
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. The cursor displays in
the Descriptor field
for Shift 1. Enter a
new descriptor, if
necessary and press
ENTER.
SHIFT TIME PROGRAMMING
SHIFT DESCRIPTOR
1
2
3
4
TTL
ALPHA
START/END TIME
00:00 - 23:99
99:99 - 99:99
99:99 - 99:99
99:99 - 99:99
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. The cursor moves to
the Start Time field
for Shift 1. The
default start time is
00:00, if necessary,
enter a new time and
press ENTER.
4. Continue to set
descriptors and start
times for each of 4
possible shifts. Enter
a start time of 99:99
to inactivate a shift.
5. Press ESC at any
point to exit the
SHIFT TIME
PROGRAMMING
screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  213
KP Time Period
Kitchen printer routing can be defined for four periods (see "Kitchen Printer Routing" on
page 195.) If you define different routing for different periods, you can set the start and end
times for the time periods here.
For example, a restaurant might require requisitions to be routed to separate hot and cold
sandwich preparation areas during lunch (11:00 AM to 2:00 PM) and at all other times, all
requisitions would be routed to the hot prep area. To meet this requirement, you could
program different kitchen printer routing for periods 1 and 2 under the Kitchen Printer
Routing program , then set the KP Time Periods as follows:
Period
Start
End Time
1
2
3
4
11:00
14:01
99:99
99:99
14:00
10:59
99:99
99:99
1. Select KP TIME
PERIOD from the
TIME ACTIVATED
FUNCTIONS MENU
to display the KP
TIME PERIOD
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. The cursor displays in
the Start Time field
for Period 1, enter a
new time and press
ENTER.
3. Continue to set start
and end times for
each of 4 possible
periods. Enter a start
time of 99:99 to
inactivate a period.
4. Press ESC at any
point to exit the KP
TIME PERIOD
PROGRAMMING
screen.
214  P-Mode Programming
KP TIME PERIOD PROGRAMMING
PERIOD
1
2
3
4
ALPHA
START/END TIME
99:99 - 99:99
99:99 - 99:99
99:99 - 99:99
99:99 - 99:99
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Product Mix Groups
Product Mix Groups can be used to implement a simplified ingredient system for tracking
only essential ingredients associated with items (i.e. cups for beverages or number of pieces
for chicken menus.)
Product mix groups also report usage by time period and optional Product Projections
reporting is also available. The Product Projection report provides a history of each item's
sales by day of week.
NOTE: Be careful not to confuse the separate and distinct inventory features of the SPS
1000:
 Product Mix Groups (described here.)
 PLU Stock (see “PLU Stock” on page225),
 Recipes and Ingredients (see “Ingredient Inventory” on page 41)
1. Select PRODUCT
MIX GROUPS from
the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PRODUCT MIX
GROUPS MENU
screen.
PRODUCT MIX GROUPS MENU
1.
2.
PRODUCT MIX ITEMS
PRODUCT MIX GROUP TIME PERIODS
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and
press ENTER.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  215
Product Mix Items
1. Select PRODUCT
MIX ITEMS from the
PRODUCT MIX
GROUPS MENU to
display the
PRODUCT MIX
ITEM
PROGRAMMING
screen.
PRODUCT MIX ITEM PROGRAMMING
ITEM#
DESCRIPTOR
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
2. Add or edit items by
moving the cursor to
a field and filling
information according 
to the table below.
Press ENTER to
finalize each field
entry, or press , ,
, or  to finalize
an entry and advance
to the next field.
PCS/UNIT
ALPHA
UNIT DESC
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press ESC to return
to the PRODUCT
MIX GROUPS
MENU.
Product Mix Item Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
DESCRIPTOR
Each product mix group item can have a 12 character alpha
descriptor.
PCS\UNIT
Enter the number of pieces in the unit. For the example shown,
120 burgers to the case- Enter 120; 30 cups to the sleeve- Enter
30.
UNIT DESC
Enter a 4 Character descriptor for the unit, using the Alphakeyboard overlay. This descriptor is for report purposes.
216  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Product Mix Group Time Periods
Memory allocation determines whether there are 24, 48, or 96 product mix group time
periods. Product mix group time periods will default to hourly periods if 24 periods are
selected in memory allocation; 30-minute periods if 48 periods are selected; 15-minute
periods if 96 periods are selected.
Periods can be set to custom lengths using this program. If fewer periods are needed than are
available, unneeded periods can be inactivated so that they will not appear on reports. To
inactivate a period replace the "A" (active) for the period with an "I" (inactive).
All time units are based upon a 24-hour clock (military time).
1. Select PRODUCT
MIX GROUP TIME
PERIODS from the
PRODUCT MIX
GROUPS MENU to
display the
PRODUCT MIX
TIME PERIOD
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Press the    
keys to select a field
to edit.
PRODUCT MIX TIME PERIOD PROGRAMMING
# OF PERIODS SET IN MEMORY:
1. (Y) 00:00-00:59
13 (Y)
2. (Y) 01:00-01:59
14 (Y)
3. (Y) 02:00-02:59
15 (Y)
4. (Y) 03:00-03:59
16 (Y)
5. (Y) 04:00-04:59
17 (Y)
6. (Y) 05:00-05:59
18 (Y)
7. (Y) 06:00-06:59
19 (Y)
8. (Y) 07:00-07:59
20 (Y)
9. (Y) 08:00-08:59
21 (Y)
10. (Y) 09:00-09:59
22 (Y)
11. (Y) 10:00-10:59
23 (Y)
12. (Y) 11:00-11:59
24 (Y)
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE
24
12:00-12:59
13:00-13:59
14:00-14:59
15:00-15:59
16:00-16:59
17:00-17:59
18:00-18:59
19:00-19:59
20:00-20:59
21:00-21:59
22:00-22:59
23:00-23:59
UP/DN 
3. Type new
information into the
field. Press ENTER.
4. Press ESC to exit the
PRODUCT MIX
TIME PERIOD
PROGRAMMING
screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  217
Custom Report Programming
One custom report can be created. Also, on the financial or employee report, any total may
be deleted, or printed in red (provided the printer has red/black printing capability.)
1. Select CUSTOM
REPORT from the PMODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
REPORT
PROGRAMMING
menu.
REPORT PROGRAMMING
1. CUSTOM REPORT
2. MODIFY EXISTING REPORTS
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and
press ENTER.
218  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Custom Report
One custom report can be created, with up to 50 totals and counters. The report is built by
selecting totals that also appear on either the financial or sales by time period reports. When
the custom report is created, totals and counters separate from the original report are also
created (in other words, you can clear the custom reports independently without affecting
totals in any other report.)
Another feature of the custom report is the ability to add or subtract selected totals to create a
new subtotal of selected information.
1. Select CUSTOM
REPORT from the
REPORT
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
CUSTOM REPORT
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Refer to "Custom
Report Program
Notes" on the
following page to fill
the fields for each
line of the report.
CUSTOM REPORT PROGRAMMING
RPT TTL
#
#
# RED
+/DESCRIPTOR
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NONADD 
NONADD 
NONADD 
NONADD 
NONADD 
NONADD 
NONADD 
NONADD 
NONADD 
NONADD 
 DONE:LIST ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press ESC to exit the
CUSTOM REPORT
PROGRAMMING
screen.
Use the total #998 to create a dashed separator line on the report.
Use the total #999 to create a subtotal line. The subtotal line will calculate the totals
designated "+" or "-" that appear sequentially after the previous subtotal line. Enter a
custom descriptor for the subtotal line.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  219
Custom Report Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
RPT#
With the field selected, press DONE to display the REPORT
LIST. Enter or select the number of the report from which the
total you wish to place on the custom report originates.
TTL#
With the field selected, press DONE to display the TOTAL
LIST. Enter or select the number of the total you wish to place
on the custom report. You must first select a RPT# before you
can select a TTL#.
RED?
Enter Y if the line is to be printed in red ink, enter N for black.
+/-
Press ENTER to select "+", "-" or NON ADD from the pop-up
window. When the subtotal TTL# code (i.e.'999') is entered on
a later line, previous totals with a + or - designation are added
and printed.
DESCRIPTOR
The default descriptor automatically displays when the TTL# is
entered. If you wish, enter a new descriptor by replacing
default descriptor. Type new information into the field, press
ENTER.
220  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Edit Existing Reports
1. Select EDIT
EXISTING
REPORTS from the
REPORT
PROGRAMMING
MENU, then from the
pop-up menu, select
FINANCIAL
REPORT or
EMPLOYEE
REPORT.
REPORT PROGRAMMING
1. CUSTOM REPORTS
2. EDIT EXISTING REPORTS
1.
2.
FINANCIAL REPORT
EMPLOYEE REPORT
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  221
2. The EDIT screen for
the report selected
displays. Each total
that appears on the
report is listed with
the default status:
PRINT=Y and
RED?=N.
3. If you wish to delete
a total from the report
move the cursor to
the PRINT? field for
the total you wish to
remove from the
report. Press the Y/N
key to change the
status to NO.
EDIT FINANCIAL REPORT
TTL#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010

DESCRIPTOR
+PLU
-PLU
+PLU
-PLU
+PLU
-PLU
+PLU
-PLU
+PLU
-PLU
LVL1
LVL1
LVL2
LVL2
LVL3
LVL3
LVL4
LVL4
LVL5
LVL5
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
PRINT?
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
RED?
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN Y/N 
4. At the RED? field,
enter Y if the line is
to be printed in red
ink, enter N for black.
5. Continue editing the
report as necessary.
6. Press ESC to exit the
CUSTOM REPORT
PROGRAMMING
screen.
222  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
String Reports
1. Select STRING
REPORTS from the
P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
STRING REPORT
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Type a string report#
and press ENTER, or
press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN until the
string report# you
wish to program is
selected.
STRING REPORT#1 PROGRAMMING
RPT LVL
#
X/Z
(1-5) RPT#
DESCRIPTOR
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X










0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN Y/N 
3. Refer to “String
Report Program
Notes” on the
following page for
instructions on filling
each field.
4. Up to 24 reports may
be executed on a
string report. Press
PAGE UP or PAGE
DN or press the  
  keys to view
all of the sequence
numbers in the report.
5. Press ESC to return
to the STRING
REPORT
PROGRAMMING
MENU screen.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  223
String Report Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
X/Z
Select the X/Z field arrow. Press ENTER to open the window.
Select the X, Z, or CURRENT option by highlighting your
selection and pressing ENTER. Use the current option if you
wish to use the string for either X or Z reports. The string report
will look at he current control lock position (either X or Z) and
generate the appropriate report.
RPT LVL (1-5)
At the RPT LVL field, select the X/Z level (i.e. Z1, X2, etc.
Remember you must have allocated memory for the report level
if you wish to execute that report.)
RPT#
DESCRIPTOR
At the RPT# field, type the report number you wish to execute in
the string. Press ENTER. The report descriptor will
automatically display.
224  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU Stock
PLU stock is a simple inventory system where each whole unit PLU activity subtracts a value
of "1" from the stock counter. (Note that if multiplication or decimal multiplication is used
when the PLU is registered, the resulting quantity of activity will subtract from the stock
counter. Stock is maintained increments to the second decimal position, i.e. “X.XX”.)
PLU stock applies only to PLUs that are assigned to a PLU status group with the Stock PLU?
setting set to Y (See “PLU Status Group” on page 39.)
Select PLU STOCK to maintain stock levels on PLUs selected for stock unit inventory.
NOTE: Be careful not to confuse the separate and distinct inventory features of the SPS
1000:
 PLU Stock (described here),
 Recipes and Ingredients (see “Ingredient Inventory” on page 41)
 Product Mix Groups (See “Product Mix Groups” on page 215.)
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  225
1. Select PLU STOCK
from the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PLU STOCK MENU
screen.
PLU STOCK MENU
1. ADD
2. OVERRIDE
3. SUBTRACT
2. Choose ADD from
the PLU STOCK
MENU to add stock
to the current level, or
Choose OVERRIDE
from the PLU
STOCK MENU to
change the current
stock amount to a
new setting, or
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Choose SUBTRACT
from the PLU
STOCK MENU to
subtract stock from
the current level.
226  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
3. The screen displays
stock for first PLU.
Enter the number of
the PLU you wish to
edit, or press the
PAGE UP or PAGE
DN keys until the
PLU you wish to edit
is viewed on the
screen.
4. Press the  key to
move the cursor to
the stock field.
PLU#00000000000001 STOCK(ADD)
DESCRIPTOR :
STOCK
PLU1
0.00
PLU# ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
5. Enter a value
assuming a two digit
decimal position (i.e.
enter 2000 to display
20.00 for 20 units.)
Press ENTER or  to
a set the entry and
advance the cursor to
the next PLU.
6. Continue to add,
override or subtract
stock as necessary.
Press ESC to exit the
program and save
changes.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  227
PLU Minimum Stock
1. Select PLU
MINIMUM STOCK
from the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to set
minimum stock
amounts (for the PLU
MINIMUM STOCK
report.)
2. The screen displays
stock for first PLU.
Enter the number of
the PLU you wish to
edit, or press the
PAGE UP or PAGE
DN keys until the
PLU you wish to edit
is viewed on the
screen.
PLU#00000000000001 MIN.STOCK PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTOR :
STOCK
PLU1
0.00
PLU# ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
3. Press the  key to
move the cursor to
the stock field.
4. Enter a value
assuming a two digit
decimal position (i.e.
enter 2000 to display
20.00 for 20 units.)
Press ENTER or  to
a set the entry and
advance the cursor to
the next PLU.
5. Press ESC to exit the
program and save
changes.
228  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Copy Program
This function allows you to duplicate programs for :

PLUs

PLU Status Groups

Keyboard Levels

WLUs
For example, all program options for one PLU can be duplicated on another PLU.
NOTE: See “General Function Options” on page 116. If General Function Option #16
“ALLOW PLU COPY BY RANGE” is set to “Y”, then the options from one PLU or
PLU Status Group can be copied to a range of PLUs or PLU Status Groups. If option
#18 is set to “N” then the options from an individual PLU or PLU Status Group can be
copied only to another individual PLU or PLU Status Group.
1. Select COPY
PROGRAM from the
P-MODE menu to
display the COPY
PROGRAM screen.
COPY PROGRAM
1.
2.
3.
4.
COPY
COPY
COPY
COPY
PLU
PLU STATUS GROUP
KEYBOARD LEVEL
WLU
2. Choose

COPY PLU

COPY PLU STATUS
GROUP

COPY KEYBOARD
LEVEL, or

COPY WLU from the
list.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-Mode Programming  229
3. At the pop-up
window, enter the #
you wish to copy
from, press ENTER,
then enter the # you
wish to copy to and
press ENTER.
(NOTE: If you allow
copying of
PLUs/PLU Status
Groups by range,
enter the range to
copy to.)
COPY PROGRAM
1.
2.
3.
4.
COPY
COPY
COPY
COPY
PLU
PLU STATUS GROUP
KEYBOARD LEVEL
WLU
FROM PLU # :
TO
PLU # :
00000000000000
00000000000000
ESC ENTER
4. The warning: "COPY
[Y]" displays.
5. Press ENTER to
complete the copy
function. Press the
Y/N key, (to select
NO) then ENTER to
escape without
copying.
230  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Program File Download
Download files only to RAM cleared registers. Download memory allocation separately first.
The All Files selection does not include memory allocation.
1. Select PROGRAM
FILE DOWNLOAD
from the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PROGRAM FILE
DOWNLOAD
screen.
PROGRAM FILE DOWNLOAD
1.
2.
ALL FILES
SELECT PROGRAM FILES
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and
press ENTER.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  231
All Files
1. Choose ALL FILES
from the PROGRAM
FILE DOWNLOAD
screen to display the
DOWNLOADING
REGISTER
SELECTION screen.
DOWNLOADING REGISTER SELECTION
1.
REGISTER :
ALL REGISTERS 
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN  DONE:DOWN
2. If you wish to
download to selected
registers, at the
REGISTER field,
press ENTER to
open the pop-up
window. Choose
SELECTED and
press ENTER to
display the
REGISTER
SELECTION screen.
DOWNLOADING REGISTER SELECTION
1.
S
REGISTER :
ALL REGISTERS
SELECTED
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN  DONE:DOWN
232  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
3. At the REGISTER
SELECTION screen,
press the    
keys to move to the
field associated with
the register you wish
to choose. Press Y/N
to toggle from yes to
no.
4. When you have
completed selecting
registers, press
DONE to download.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
REGISTER SELECTION:
01
N
09
N
17
N
25
N
02
N
10
N
18
N
26
N
03
N
11
N
19
N
27
N
04
N
12
N
20
N
28
N
05
N
13
N
21
N
29
N
06
N
14
N
22
N
30
N
07
N
15
N
23
N
31
N
08
N
16
N
24
N
32
N
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN  DONE:DOWN
P-Mode Programming  233
Select Program Files
1. Choose SELECT
PROGRAM FILES
from the PROGRAM
FILE DOWNLOAD
screen to display the
DOWNLOADING
PROGRAM FILE
SELECTION screen.
DOWNLOADING PROGRAM FILE SELECTION
1.
2.
REGISTER :
ALL REGISTERS 
PROGRAM FILE SELECTION
DATE & TIME
N
PLU
N
PLU STATUS GROUP
N
GROUP
N
FUNCTION KEY
N
MACRO
N
TARE WEIGHT
N
GENERAL FUNCTION OPTION
N
TAX OPTION
N
CASH DRAWER OPTION
N
2. At the REGISTER
field, choose ALL
REGISTERS or
SELECTED. (If you
 ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN  DONE:DOWN
choose selected,
choose registers in the
same manner as ALL
DOWNLOADING PROGRAM FILE SELECTION
FILES downloading.
3. At he PROGRAM
FILE SELECTION
field, press PAGE
UP or PAGE DN
and/or the   keys to
select the items you
wish to download.
Press Y/N to toggle
from yes to no.
4. When you have
completed selecting
programs, press
DONE to download.
TRAINING MODE OPTION
LEVEL/MODIFIER OPTION
TRACKING FILE OPTION
KITCHEN PRINTER/VIDEO OPTION
VALIDATION/SUBTOTAL PRINT OPTION
GENERAL PRINTING OPTION
REPORT OPTION
TIME KEEPING OPTION
E.J. & DETAIL PRINTING OPTION
TAX
LOGO MESSAGE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
 ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN  DONE:DOWN
DOWNLOADING PROGRAM FILE SELECTION
ERROR MESSAGE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTOR
FINANCIAL REPORT DESCRIPTOR
EMPLOYEE REPORT DESCRIPTOR
CHECK ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
GUEST CHECK LOGO MESSAGE
VALIDATION MESSAGE
WINDOW LOOK UP (WLU)
TIME PERIOD
EMPLOYEE
JOBCODE
PAYRATE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
 ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN  DONE:DOWN
234  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
DOWNLOADING PROGRAM FILE SELECTION
AUTHORITY LEVEL
SYSTEM PRINTER CONFIGURATION
KITCHEN VIDEO ROUTING
KITCHEN PRINTER ROUTING
RECEIPT PRINTER ROUTING
DETAIL PRINTER ROUTING
INGREDIENT
RECEIPE TABLE
TIME ACTIVATED KEYBOARD LEVEL
TIME ACTIVATED PRICE LEVEL
TIME ACTIVATED MACRO
TIME ACTIVATED STRING REPORT
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
 ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN  DONE:DOWN
DOWNLOADING PROGRAM FILE SELECTION
SHIFT TIME
KP TIME PERIOD
PRODUCT MIX ITEMS
PRODUCT MIX GROUP TIME PERIOD
CUSTOM REPORT
EDIT FINANCIAL REPORT
EDIT EMPLOYEE RPOERT
STRING REPORT
PLU MINIMUM STOCK
NON-PLU CODE
KEYBOARD KEY RELOCATION
S-MODE SYSTEM OPTION
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
 ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN  DONE:DOWN
DOWNLOADING PROGRAM FILE SELECTION
PRINTER DRIVER
MEMORY ALLOCATION
BITMAP IMAGE
GROUPS BY EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE CARD READ FORMAT
AGE VERIFICATION
N
N
N
N
N
N
 ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN  DONE:DOWN
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  235
P-Mode Program Scan Printing
This function allows you to print copies of the register’s P-Mode programming.
1. Select PROGRAM
SCAN PRINTING
from the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
P-MODE
PROGRAM SCAN
PRINTING screen.
2. Choose an item from
the menu in one of
two ways:
Type the number for
your choice and press
ENTER.
Press the  or  keys
to move the cursor to
your choice and
press ENTER.
3. After selection, the
appropriate report is
printed.
P-MODE PROGRAM SCAN PRINTING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11.
12.

PLU BY RANGE
PLU BY PLU STATUS GROUP
PLU BY SELECTED PRICE LEVEL
PLU STATUS GROUP BY RANGE
GROUP BY RANGE
ALL FUNCTION KEY
SYSTEM OPTION
TAXES
MESSAGES
WINDOW LOOK UP (WLU)
TIME PERIOD
EMPLOYEE BY RANGE
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-MODE PROGRAM SCAN PRINTING
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.

JOB CODE
PAY RATE
AUTHORITY LEVEL
PRINTER TABLES & KV ROUTING
INGREDIENT INVENTORY
TIME ACTIVATED FUNCTIONS
PRODUCT MIX GROUPS
CUSTOM REPORT
STRING REPORT
PLU STOCK BY RANGE
PLU MINIMUM STOCK BY RANGE
NON-PLU CODE
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
P-MODE PROGRAM SCAN PRINTING
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.

236  P-Mode Programming
PRODUCT MIX GROUPS
CUSTOM REPORT
STRING REPORT
PLU STOCK BY RANGE
PLU MINIMUM STOCK BY RANGE
NON-PLU CODE
TARE WEIGHTS
KEYBOARD
MACRO
GROUPS BY EMPOYEE BY RANGE
EMPLOYEE CARD READ FORMAT
AGE VERIFICATION
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
NON-PLU Code
The NON-PLU Code program must be set if you wish to scan UPCs (using the EAN 13 code)
with embedded prices, weights or quantities.
Within the EAN 13 code, the first two digits (part a) are used as an identifier and the last digit
(part c) is used as a check digit. The remaining 10 digits (part b) contain the product code
and the price (or weight or quantity).
021234500250
c) check digit
a) identifier
b) product code & price
There are 11 identifier numbers available for non-PLU code programming: “02” and “20”
through “29”. The purpose of this program is to define the format of the 10-digit part b for
each possible identifier. For example:

The structure of Non PLU identifier “02” can be defined to use 5 digits for the product
code and 5 digits for the price.

The structure of Non PLU identifier “20” can be defined to use 6 digits for the product
code and 4 digits for the price.
To Program Non-PLU codes:
1. Select NON-CODE
PLU from the PMODE MENU to
display the NONCODE PLU
PROGRAMMING
screen.
2. Choose one of the
non-PLU identifiers
(“02” or “20” through
“29”).
NON-PLU CODE PROGRAMMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
PLU
PLU
PLU
PLU
PLU
PLU
PLU
PLU
PLU
PLU
PLU
#02˜
#20˜
#21˜
#22˜
#23˜
#24˜
#25˜
#26˜
#27˜
#28˜
#29˜
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  237
3. The NON-PLU#
PROGRAMMING
screen displays for
the identifier you
have chosen to
program.
NON-PLU# 1 (PLU#02˜) PROGRAMMING
LENGTH OF FIELD 1=PLU CODE)
LENGTH OF FIELD 2
CONTENT OF FIELD 2
USE PRICE CHECK DIGIT
TAB OR DECIMAL POINT OF FIELD 2
0
0
PRICE 
N
0
4. Use the table below
as a reference in
filling the fields of
this screen.
5. Press ESC to return
to the NON-CODE
PLU
PROGRAMMING
screen.
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
NON-PLU Code Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
LENGTH OF FIELD 1
Assign the length of the product code field. (The
length of field 1 plus field 2 must equal 10.)
LENGTH OF FIELD 2
Assign the length of the price/weight/quantity field.
(The length of field 1 plus field 2 must equal 10.)
CONTENT OF FIELD 2
Select the type of content for field 2: price, weight or
quantity.
USE PRICE CHECK DIGIT
Select “Y” if the price field includes a check digit.
TAB OR DECIMAL POINT
OF FIELD 2
Enter the decimal point position for the
price/weight/quantity field.
238  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU & WLU Key Assignment
1. Select PLU & WLU
KEY ASSIGNMENT
from the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
PLU & WLU KEY
ASSIGNMENT
screen.
2. Press a numeric digit
(1-2) or use the  or
 keys to move the
cursor to PLU KEYS
or WLU KEYS, then
press ENTER to
indicate whether you
wish to program a
PLU or WLU.
3. A pop up window
displays the keyboard
level selection.
Select the keyboard
level you wish to
program, press
ENTER.
PLU & WLU KEY RELOCATION
1.
2.
PLU KEYS
WLU KEYS
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
KEYBOARD KEY RELOCATION
1.
2.
PLU KEYS
WLU KEYS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
1
2
3
4
5
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  239
PLU Key Assignment
This process assigns the PLU number that is registered when a PLU key is operated.
1. Press any PLU key to
read and/or change
the current
assignment, or press
ESC to exit.
PLU KEY ASSIGNMENT PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1

OR

2. Type the PLU
number you wish to
be located at this PLU
key position. Press
ENTER to assign the
number, or press ESC
to exit without
changing the current
assignment.
PRESS ANY PLU KEY TO READ AND/OR
CHANGE CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
PRESS ESC TO EXIT
PLU KEY ASSIGNMENT PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL : 1
KEY POSITION :
CURRENT PLU#: 00000000000001
PLU1
1
ESC ENTER
240  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
3. The old and new
assignments for the
key you have just
programmed display.
Continue to program
PLU key locations as
necessary by pressing
another key.
4. Press ESC to exit. At
the prompt:
EXIT? [Y] press
ENTER.
PLU KEY ASSIGNMENT PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1

PRESS PLU KEY TO READ AND/OR
CHANGE CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
OR

PRESS ESC TO EXIT
KEY POSITION 13:
OLD ASSIGNMENT=PLU# 0000000000001
NEW ASSIGNMENT=PLU# 0000000000002
5. At the prompt:
SAVE KEY
RELOCATION? [Y]
press ENTER, or
press the Y/N key,
then press ENTER to
exit without saving
changes.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  241
WLU Key Assignment
This process assigns the WLU number that is displayed when a WLU key is operated.
1. Press any WLU key
to read and/or change
the current
assignment, or press
ESC to exit.
WLU KEY ASSIGNMENT PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1

OR

2. Type the WLU
number you wish to
be located at this
WLU key position.
Press ENTER to
assign the number, or
press ESC to exit
without changing the
current assignment.
PRESS ANY WLU KEY TO READ AND/OR
CHANGE CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
PRESS ESC TO EXIT
WLU KEY ASSIGNMENT PROGRAMMING
KEYBOARD LEVEL : 1
CURRENT WLU#:
KEY POSITION :
01
1
ESC ENTER
242  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
WLU KEY ASSIGNMENT PROGRAMMING
3. The old and new
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1
assignments for the
key you have just
 PRESS ANY WLU KEY TO READ AND/OR
CHANGE CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
programmed display.
Continue to program
OR
WLU key locations as
necessary by pressing
 PRESS ESC TO EXIT
another key.
4. Press ESC to exit. At
the prompt:
EXIT? [Y] press
ENTER.
KEY POSITION 13:
OLD ASSIGNMENT=WLU# 01
NEW ASSIGNMENT=WLU# 02
5. At the prompt:
SAVE KEY
RELOCATION? [Y]
press ENTER, or
press the Y/N key,
then press ENTER to
exit without saving
changes.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  243
Bitmap File Download
If you are printing a bitmap image on a printer (use must be using a printer with bitmap
image capability) you can send the bitmap to the printer using this program.
1. Select BITMAP FILE
DOWNLOAD from
the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
BITMAP FILE
DOWNLOAD
Screen.
2. Press the   keys to
select the port the
appropriate printer is
connected to and
press ENTER to
download the image
244  P-Mode Programming
BITMAP FILE DOWNLOAD
L1
PORT#1
PORT#2
PORT#3
PORT#4
PORT#5
PORT#6
PORT#7
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Groups By Employee
If you choose to use groups by employee (see "Memory Allocation" on page 37) you can
select which of the 99 available groups are reported for each employee. For example, you
may wish to report only food related groups for servers and beverage related groups for
bartenders.
1. Select GROUPS BY
EMPLOYEE from
the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
GROUPS BY
EMPLOYEE Screen.
2. Type the
EMPLOYEE number
and press ENTER, or
press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN to scroll
to the Employee you
wish to program.
3. Press the  to
advance the cursor to
the GROUP# field for
group #01.
4. Type the number of
the group you wish to
report, press ENTER.
The descriptor for the
group will
automatically fill the
DESCRIPTOR field.
5. Continue to program
group selections for
up to 30 possible
reporting groups.
Press PAGE UP or
PAGE DN as
necessary to view all
30 groups.
GROUPS BY EMPLOYEE#
#
-01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10

GROUP#
-----00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

L1
DESCRIPTOR
----------
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
GROUPS BY EMPLOYEE#
#
-01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
1 PROGRAMMING
GROUP#
-----01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
1 PROGRAMMING
L1
DESCRIPTOR
---------GROUP1
ESC Y/N ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
6. Press ESC to exit the
GROUPS BY
EMPLOYEE
program screen
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  245
Employee Card Read Format
1. Select EMPLOYEE
CARD READ
FORMAT from the
P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
EMPLOYEE CARD
READ FORMAT
Screen.
EMPLOYEE CARD READ FORMAT
1.
2.
3.
4.
READ
CARD ID
CHECK CARD ID?
COLUMN OF CARD ID
START
DIGIT
5. COLUMN OF NUMBER
START
DIGIT
L1
TRACK1 
0000000000
N
00
00
00
00
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
Employee Card Read Format Program Notes
FIELD
Notes
READ
Set to the Track (1 or 2) that you wish to read.
CARD ID
If ID numbers are to be used, enter the ID number (up
to 10 digits) from the magnetic cards that will be
accepted. If ID numbers are not to be used, ignore this
field.
CHECK CARD ID?
Enter Y to use card ID numbers, or N if you do not
wish to use card ID numbers.
COLUMN OF CARD ID
Enter the number of the column that the Card ID starts.
CARD ID DIGITS
Enter the number of digits to be read for the Card ID.
COLUMN OF NUMBER
Enter the number of the column that the Card number
starts.
CARD NUMBER DIGITS
Enter the number of digits to be read for the Card
number.
246  P-Mode Programming
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Age Verification
Sale of age restricted items (i.e. alcohol, tobacco) can be controlled at the point of sale by
forcing to operator to enter a date of birth before a controlled item can be registered. Because
you may wish to use this feature for items controlled at a different age (i.e. alcohol may be
allowed at age 21 and tobacco may be allowed at age 18), up to five different ages can be
entered here. The age category (1-5) is entered at the appropriate PLU Status group program.
1. Select AGE
VERIFICATION
from the P-MODE
PROGRAMMING
MENU to display the
AGE
VERIFICATION
Screen.
AGE VERIFICATION
L1
1
2
3
4
5
00
00
00
00
00
2. Type an age for the
first age category,
press ENTER.
3. If necessary enter
ages for the
remaining age
categories
ESC ENTER PAGE UP/DN 
4. Press ESC to return
to the P-MODE
MENU.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
P-Mode Programming  247
Appendices
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Appendices  249
Specifications
Item
Description
Processor
MOTOROLA MC68EN302 (32bit)
INTEL 80C32 / WINBOND 78C32 (8bit)
Memory
 MC68EN302
Default : SRAM (KM6164000B*1) : 4Mbits
FLASH MEMORY (AM29F800B*1) : 8Mbits
Option : SRAM (KM6164000B*4) : 16Mbits (Max)
 80C32 / 78C32
SRAM (KM62256*1) : 256Kbits
EPROM (27C512*1) : 512Kbits
 VIDEO RAM (KM62256*2) : 256Kbits*2
Data Storage
90 Days - When battery is fully charged
Battery
Ni-Cad, 3.6V, 600mAh
Charging time : 24 Hours
Life : 3 Years
Display
 SPS-1000 : Front - LCD display (320X240 dots)
Rear - LCD display (20charsx1line)
Keyboard
Flat Rubber Key : 169Keys
Interface
Default : RS-232C
IRC
: 3 ports
: 1port
Cash Drawer : 3 ports
IRC
Option
: RS-232C
Mode
: ETHERNET
Speed
: 10Mbps
Working Temperatures
387mm(L)291mm(W) 219mm(H)
5.1kg
U.S.A : AC120V, 60HZ, 0.2A
Stand-by : 15W (Max)
Operating : 18W (Max)
0 to 40c
Working Humidity
10 to 90%
External Dimensions
Weight
Power Source
Power Consumption
250  Appendices
: 4 ports
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Accessing Cables and Connections
Removing the Rear Cover
1. Remove the two screws (1) on the lower case.
2. Remove the rear cover (2).
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Appendices  251
Removing the Customer Display
1. Remove the screw (1) securing the customer display.
2. Push down on the lower case pawl (2) to release the lock and pull out the
Customer Display in the direction of the arrow (3) at the same time.
252  Appendices
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Connecting RS232C, IRC, and Cash Drawer Cables
1. Remove the rear cover and the customer display.
2. Connect cables to each port as necessary
Note: When connecting the interface cables, attach the ferrite core in each cable as
shown in figure 4-7.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Appendices  253
Register Communications Ports
Standard Ports
PORT
CONNECTOR TYPE
ETHERNET
Standard RJ45/8 wire
SERIAL #1
PC type DB9/male
SERIAL #2
PC type DB9/male
SERIAL #3
Standard RJ45/8 wire
DRAWER 1
Standard RJ45/6 wire
DRAWER 2
Standard RJ45/6 wire
DRAWER 3
Standard RJ45/6 wire
Optional Ports
PORT
CONNECTOR TYPE
SERIAL #4
Standard RJ45/8 wire
SERIAL #5
Standard RJ45/8 wire
SERIAL #6
Standard RJ45/8 wire
SERIAL #7
Standard RJ45/8 wire
Pin Descriptions
PIN#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CONN.
Serial
Serial
Port 1
Port 2
/DCD
NC
RxD
RxD
TxD
TxD
/DTR
/DTR
GND
GND
/DSR
/DSR
/RTS
/RTS
/CTS
/CTS
Vcc
Vcc
D-SUB9(Male)
254  Appendices
SIGNALS
Serial
Serial
IRC
Port 3
Port 4~7
Port
Vcc
NC
TPTx+
/DSR
/DSR
TPTxTxD
TxD
TPRx+
RxD
RxD
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
TPRxGND
GND
NC
/DTR
/DTR
NC
RJ-45 (Modular 8Pin)
Drawer
Drawer
Drawer
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
FGND
FGND
FGND
Solenoid(-) Solenoid(-) Solenoid(-)
COMP1
COMP2
COMP3
24V
24V
24V
Solenoid(-) Solenoid(-) Solenoid(-)
GND
GND
GND
RJ-11 (Modular 6Pin)
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Loop Back Connections
Serial 1-2 (DSUB9)
1. /DCD
2. RxD
3. TxD
4. /DTR
5. GND
6. /DSR
7. /RTS
8. /CTS
9. Vcc
Serial 3 (RJ-45)
1. Vcc
2. /DSR
3. TxD
4. RxD
5. NC
6. NC
7. GND
8. /DTR
IRC (RJ-45)
1. TPTX+
2. TPTX3. TPRX+
4. NC
5. NC
6. TPRX7. NC
8. NC
Serial 4-7 (RJ-45)
1. NC
2. /DSR
3. TxD
4. RxD
5. NC
6. NC
7. GND
8. /DTR
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Appendices  255
System Configurations
Inter Register Communications
Each SPS 1000 includes a standard Ethernet communications port. This port is used for all
register-to-register communications. Except for 2-registers configurations, registers are
linked by connecting each register to an Ethernet hub.
2-Register Configuration
Two registers can be connected without a hub by a special cable. See "Crossover Cable" on
the following page for cable construction.
SPS 1000
#1
SPS 1000
#2
E-net
E-net
Crossover cable
3 or More Register Configurations
For example, a 3-register installation might look like this:
SPS 1000
#1
E-net
SPS 1000
#2
E-net
SPS 1000
#3
E-net
HUB
1 2 3 4
Contact your SAM4s sales representative to order the appropriate Ethernet hubs. Hubs will
be stocked in 5 port and 8 port configurations.
256  Appendices
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Crossover Cable
1 RD+
2 RC-
RD+ 1
RC- 2
3 TD+
6 TD-
TD+ 3
TD- 6
Ethernet Specifications
More information to be supplied at a later time.
Hub Speed 10 Mbps
SPS 1000 Program Manual
(10 million bits per second)
Appendices  257
Printer Configurations
Because the SPS 1000 does not include an internal printer, receipts, sales journals and/or
requisitions are printed using industry standard R2 232C printers that can be connected to a
serial port on any register within an SPS 1000 system.
Shared Printers
Printer functions can be directed from any register to any printer in the system. For example,
at a food service counter with 3 registers, all registers can direct receipts to the same printer,
as in the diagram below:
SPS 1000
#1
Serial
E-net
SPS 1000
#2
E-net
SPS 1000
#3
E-net
HUB
1 2 3 4
#1
Receipt
Printer
Notes for the Programmer:


258  Appendices
Use P-Mode program #12 “Printer Tables & KV Routing”, selection #4 “Receipt
Printer Routing” to direct receipts from registers to printers.
Use P-Mode program #12 “Printer Tables & KV Routing”, selection #5 “Detail
Printer Routing” to direct sales journals from registers to printers.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Requisition Printers
Requisitions can be directed from any register to any printer in the system. For example, at a
food service counter with 3 registers and three preparation areas, registers and printers might
be connected in a system as in the diagram below:
SPS 1000
#1
Serial1
E-net
#1
Receipt
Printer
SPS 1000
#2
Serial1
E-net
SPS 1000
#3
Serial1 Serial2
#2
Drink Requisition
Printer
E-net
#3
Hot Food
Requisition
Printer
HUB
1 2 3 4
#4
Cold Food
Requisition
Printer
Within this system, printing instructions from any of the registers can be directed to the
appropriate printer, for example:

All registers direct receipts to printer #1.

All registers direct drink items to printer #2

All registers direct hot food items to printer #3

All registers direct cold food items to printer #4
Notes for the Programmer:




Use P-Mode program #1 “PLU”, to assign a PLU to a PLU Status Group.
Use P-Mode program #2 “PLU Status Group” options #30 to enable printing on
kitchen printer and option #31 to assign status groups to KP#’s.
Use P-Mode program #12 “Printer Tables & KV Routing”, selection #3 “Kitchen
Printer Routing” assign KP#’s to printers.
Use P-Mode program #12 “Printer Tables & KV Routing”, selection #1 “System
Printer Configuration” assign printers to specific ports on registers within the
system.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Appendices  259
Integrated Payment Program Requirements
1. See Serial Port Device Selections on page 57 to assign the device to the appropriate serial
port. For credit only select “EFT TERMINAL”; for debit select “PDC”.
2. See Define Serial Port Parameters on page 59 to set the baud rate, parity, and other
options for each serial port. NOTE: Port Paramaters are the same for the EFT Terminal
and the PDC (2400 BAUD, parity NONE, data bits 8, stop bits 1).
3. See System Options (S-Mode) on page 53 to set the appropriate options:
Set option #13 to the number of the terminal in the IRC system where the DataTran is
connected.
Set option #16 to DataTran if MSR is connected to DataTran. (Select Register if
connected to register; use PDC for debit applications) Option #17 is set only if Debit is
used.
Set option #18 for PIN encryption method: DUKPT or ROTATE KEY.
4. See General Printing Options on page 138 to set the appropriate options:
Set option #30 to the number of drafts you wish printed.
Set option #31 to Y if you wish a tip line printed on the draft.
Set option #32, if Y, all drafts will have the credit card # truncated (***********1234).
If N, the merchant copy will show all numbers (1234567812345678 03/05)
5. See Misc Tend 1-16Options on page 98 to identify payment key functions:
Set CONNECT EFT TERMINAL to Y.
Set KEY IS to CREDIT, DEBIT,or GIFT, depending upon function.
6. See PLU Status Group (PLU Status Link) Programming on page 75.
If you are using gift cards, you must create a PLU for gift card issuing and that PLU must
be linked to a PLU Status Group with PLU status option #45 set to “ACTIVATE”.
If you are using gift cards and wish to add value to an existing card, you must create a
PLU for gift card value adding and link it to a PLU status group with PLU status option
#45 set to “ADD”.
260  Appendices
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Clear Current Batch (S-Mode)
The clear batch command erases all the current batch transactions from the DataTran memory
even if they have not been settled. A LOCAL TRANSACTION INQUIRY should be printed
prior to clearing the batch. This will ensure that the operator has the transaction detail to reenter if required.
This operation should only be done under the direction of DATACAP.
To clear a batch:
1. Turn the key lock to the S-Mode position.
2. From the S-Mode meun select #2 MEMORY CLEAR,
3. From the MEMORY CLEAR menu, select #20 CLEAR CURRENT BATCH.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Appendices  261
Replacing the Battery
The Label Rating is attached to the bottom surface of the register. The Label has the "BAT.NEXT:" line to show the battery replacement date. When the "BAT.-NEXT:" is reached,
contact your SAM4s dealer to order a replacement. (Battery life is approximately three
years.)
262  Appendices
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Glossary of Terms
Activity Count
The activity counter keeps track of the number of times an entry is made on a PLU, or
function key.
Add Check
The Add Check function is used to add multiple guest checks (tracking balances or soft
checks) for payment together. (Use Tray Subtotal to add separate transactions when you are
not tracking balances.)
Alpha Keyboard Overlay
The alpha keyboard overlay represents a new set of functions and characters for each key on
the keyboard. When you are programming a field that requires alphanumeric entries, the
keyboard automatically shifts into the alpha keyboard so that you can simply type the
message or descriptor you wish to program. An overlay legend sheet is provided to place on
the keyboard while you are programming.
Audaction
Refers to the total of all sales ending in a negative balance.
Authority Levels
Each employee must be assigned to one of nine authority levels. Each of the levels is set up
to determine the operations that are allowed for each employee.
For example, in a restaurant an authority level with the descriptor kitchen help could be set to
allow only clocking in/out, or an authority level with the descriptor owner could be set up to
allow all functions. Other authority levels could be defined for servers, cashiers and
managers that allow only the appropriate functions.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Glossary of Terms  259
Auto Grill
Use the Auto Grill option to send items individual items to the designated kitchen printer.
Items are sent with a one-item delay (at the next item or at subtotal.)
Auto Scale
Registrations of PLUs with auto scale status will automatically multiply by the weight placed
upon a scale connected to the register. Use for items such as produce that are always sold by
weight.
Auto Tare
With auto tare status assigned, a preprogrammed tare weight will automatically subtract from
the weight from the scale.
Bitmap File
The bitmap file is an image, i.e. a logo that can be printed on a receipt or guest check. The
bitmap file is downloaded to the SPS 1000 from a PC, and then downloaded to the memory
of the appropriate printer.
Canadian Donut Law
Refers to special Provincial or State sales tax laws that change the taxable status of an item
depending upon the quantity sold. Donuts, for example, might be taxable when sold
individually at a bakery. However, if a customer purchases a dozen, the food sale is
considered non-taxable.
Cancel
Press the CANCEL function to abort a transaction in progress. All current items are removed
(voided).
Check Cash
Use the CHECK CASH function to exchange a check for cash outside of a sale.
Check Endorse
If compulsory check endorsement is set with the CHECK key, use the CHECK ENDORSE
function to print the endorsement message after a check is inserted into the appropriate
printer.
Compulsory
When an operation is programmed compulsory, a function (i.e. Non-add number entry) must
be performed in order to complete the operation.
260  Glossary of Terms
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Condiment
Condiments PLUs are different from non-condiment PLUs in the manner they display and
print during operations. Non-condiment PLUs are used for "main" items. Condiment items
are indented and displayed/printed below a main item so that condiments or cooking
instructions are easily understood for each "main" item.
Continue
Use the Continue function to override the pop-up employee function after a transaction.
Allows the employee to post an additional transaction without signing on again.
Currency Conversion
Use one of the 5 available currency conversion functions to convert and display the value of
the transaction in foreign currency. Only cash tender is allowed after pressing a CURR
CONV key. Change is calculated and issued in home currency.
Custom Report
One custom report can be created, with up to 50 totals and counters. The report is built by
selecting totals that also appear on either the financial or sales by time period reports. When
the custom report is created, totals and counters separate from the original report are also
created (in other words, you can clear either the custom independently without affecting
totals in any other report.)
Another feature of the custom report is the ability to add or subtract selected totals to create a
new subtotal of selected information.
Default Program
The original program installed in the ER-550. The register has a default program, which
makes it operational after a RAM clear. Nearly all option, rate, and status programs are set to
zero as the default condition.
Destination
Refers to the destination for the sale i.e. eat-in, take out, drive thru.
Discount (Item)
An item discount (coupon or %) subtracts an amount or percentage from the price of an item.
This subtraction nets the Department or PLU total.
Discount (Sale)
A sale discount (coupon or %) subtracts an amount or percentage from the entire sale.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Glossary of Terms  261
Electronic Journal
The electronic journal is an area of memory designated to keep a sales journal. The
electronic journal can be printed, if necessary, to provide a traditional record of all register
activity.
Error Condition
An error condition signals that an incorrect operation has occurred. It is identified by an
audible tone and an error descriptor appearing on the display.
Error Correct
An error correct operation voids the last item entered, it must be used within a sale.
Food Stamps
In the United States, Food Stamps may be used to purchase eligible food items at food stores
that participate in the program. The SPS 1000 can assist a retailer in handling food stamp
transactions by sorting food stamp and non-food stamp eligible items within each sale and
tracking food stamp payments for eligible items.
Gallonage
Gallonage is a status that can be assigned to a PLU. Gallonage PLUs accept a price, but print
both the price and the quantity of gallons sold. The quantity of gallons is computed from the
price per gallon, which is set as the preset price.
Groups
Groups are totals that collect information from designated PLUs. For example all PLU
dessert items could collect in a group total called "desserts". You can send each PLU to up to
three groups. The first group is designated in PLU programming, the second and third groups
are designated in PLU Status Group programming.
HALO
The high amount lock-out (HALO) limits the amount allowed to be entered in a PLU, or
function key.
Ingredient Inventory
A menu-explosion type inventory system is set up when PLUs are linked to a recipe number.
The X-MODE MANAGER MENU provides functions to receive, transfer in/out, or enter raw
waste for ingredients used in the recipe system.
262  Glossary of Terms
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Initial Clear
The initial clear function allows you to exit any register activity and return to a beginning or
cleared state. Any transaction that is in progress will be exited and totals for that transaction
will not be updated.
IRC
Inter Register Communications (IRC) is the term used to describe communications within a
network of registers. Information exchanged between registers includes check information
for posting to guest check, information to be printed or displayed at printers or videos, and
sales information for consolidated reporting.
The SPS 1000 uses ETHERNET at 10Mbps for IRC.
Job Codes
Job codes are used to break down the hours worked for all employees into different categories
(See "Labor Groups" report in the Operation Manual.) A breakdown of hours by job is also
reported for each employee (See "Time Keeping" reports in the Operation Manual.)
Keyboard Level
Each keyboard level is a separately defined set of keyboard functions for each key on the
keyboard. For example, separate levels might be required for different lunch/dinner menus.
Or, within a restaurant different keyboards might be set up for pre-check, bar and/or cashier
stations. Each register might contain the functions for each station on a separate level, so that
any register could function at any station by simply changing keyboard levels and key legend
sheets.
The SPS 1000 has five keyboard levels.
Link PLU
If you wish the registration a PLU to automatically cause the registration of another PLU,
enter the number of the PLU you wish to register automatically in the LINK PLU field of the
appropriate PLU Status Group.
Macro
Macros record key sequences for later execution. Up to 40 macros may be recorded and
executed by pressing a function key or by entering the appropriate macro number and
pressing a function key.
Memo PLUs
Use Memo PLUs to display a descriptor on the screen or print a descriptor at a printer.
Memo PLUs do not add to any total in the SPS 1000.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Glossary of Terms  263
Memory Allocation
Memory allocation is a program that determines how the system memory is divided to
provide the correct features for your application. For example, you may require more or less
employee memory, PLUs, or reporting. Memory allocation allows you to maximize the
features you need while minimizing the features you do not need.
Modifier
Preceding a PLU entry, a modifier key changes a digit of the PLU number, causing a
different PLU to be registered. Modifier keys can be set to change any of the 14 PLU digit
positions to any specified digit (0-9). More than one modifier key can be pressed in
succession to alter the PLU code.
No Sale
No sale is an operation to simply open the cash drawer.
NON-PLU Code
The NON-PLU Code program must be set if you wish to scan UPCs (using the EAN 13 code)
with embedded prices, weights or quantities.
Within the EAN 13 code, the first two digits (part a) are used as an identifier and the last digit
(part c) is used as a check digit. The remaining 10 digits (part b) contain the product code
and the price (or weight or quantity).
Override
Override is an operation used to bypass a programmed price or HALO.
Password
A four-digit password can be set to control access to reports. Different passwords can be set
for X and Z1, Z2 etc. reports.
A system password can be set to allow service access to all of the functions of the SPS 1000.
For example, use the system password if you are servicing a users system and you do not
know an employee code that allows you to access necessary functions, or if authority level
programming prohibits you from accessing functions you need to access in order to complete
your tasks.
Piece Count
The piece count is the value assigned to a PLU item that represents the number of unit pieces
sold when the PLU is registered. For example, the number of pieces of chicken can be
counted when a chicken dinner is sold. The number of units set as the piece count will be
reflected in product mix reporting.
264  Glossary of Terms
SPS 1000 Program Manual
PLU Status Link #
Also referred to as PLU Status Group. The status link # contains the many of the configurable
options for a PLU.
PLUs
Price look-ups (PLUs) are used to register items. PLUs can be fixed keys on the keyboard or
they can be accessed by indexing a code number and pressing the PLU key. PLUs can be
programmed with a preset or open price. PLUs record their own activity count and dollar
total on any of the PLU reports.
Post Tendering
The Post Tendering feature allows the operator to use the register to compute change on cash
transactions after the sale has been finalized.
To calculate change due after finalizing the sale, enter the cash amount presented by the
customer and then press CASH. The amount of change due the customer is then displayed,
and the cash drawer may open.
This is a calculation function only, and no totals or counters are updated by the use of this
feature.
Price Level
Prices may be assigned at up to five different price levels for each item. One of up to 20
price level keys is identified for each different PLU price.
Product Mix Groups/Product Mix Reporting
Product Mix Groups can be used to implement a simplified ingredient system for tracking
only essential ingredients associated with items (i.e. cups for beverages or number of pieces
for chicken menus.)
Product mix groups also report usage by time period and optional Product Projections
reporting is also available. The Product Projection report provides a history of each item's
sales by day of week.
Promo
The PROMO operation allows items to be sold without cost, i.e. buy two, and get one free.
PROMO activity will remove the item cost from the sale, but the sales count will include the
promo item.
Receipt
A receipt is a printed tape given to a customer as a record of the sale transaction.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Glossary of Terms  265
Recipe #
A menu-explosion type inventory system is set up when PLUs are assigned to a recipe
number.
Register Number
The register number is a programmable number, which prints on the receipt and journal tapes.
It identifies the electronic cash register the sale or report was performed on.
Stay-Down
When a function is programmed as a stay-down function, it is valid until changed. For
example, a stay-down clerk remains signed on until either signed off, or another clerk is
signed on.
Stock PLU
Stock PLUs track the quantity of the PLU item in stock. Each time the PLU is registered, a
whole unit subtracts from the stock counter. (Note that if multiplication or decimal
multiplication is used when the PLU is registered, the resulting quantity of activity will
subtract from the stock counter. Stock is maintained increments to the second decimal
position, i.e. "X.XX".)
Super Macro
The super macro records transaction keystrokes, including key position changes. The size of
the super macro, in keystrokes, is set in memory allocation (see "Memory Allocation" on
page 37.) When the super macro memory is full, the most recent entries will be added and
the oldest discarded. Use the super macro as a troubleshooting tool.
Surcharge (Item)
An item percent surcharge adds a percentage to the price of an item. This addition nets the
PLU total.
Surcharge (Sale)
A sale percent surcharge adds a percentage to the entire sale.
Tare Weight
A tare is the amount of weight accounted for by the container or packaging. By entering a
tare weight (as required by law in some areas) the weight of the container is subtracted and
only the true weight of the product is measured on the scale.
Tax Except
Tax except is used to exclude the tax from an entire sale.
266  Glossary of Terms
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Tax Shift
Tax shift keys are used to reverse the tax status of a PLU entry.
Tender
The method of register operation in which payment is made and the transaction is finalized.
Transaction Number
A count appears at the bottom of each receipt and after each transaction on the journal tape.
This count increases by one with each transaction, report, or scan.
Void
A void operation will erase a previous item entry. It must be used inside of a sale only.
Waste
The Waste function is used to start and end entries of items that are wasted. A waste count is
maintained for each item and inventory is adjusted.
WLU
WLU stands for Window Look Up. A WLU pops up and displays a list of items on the
operator screen. Three types of items that can be found on a Window Look-Up (WLU):
condiments, functions, and PLUs.
Typically, a WLU is used to display a list of instructions or choices associated with an item.
A WLU can be linked to a subsequent WLU in order to prompt an operator through a
sequence of selections. The default capacity of each WLU is 28 items; the maximum
capacity is 50 items.
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Glossary of Terms  267
Index
#
C
#/No Sale 101
#/NO SALE 8
Cables and Connections 251
Canadian Donut Law 77
tax exempt Qty 122
Cancel 89
CANCEL 6
Cash 89
CASH 6
Cash declaration compulsory 143, 144
Cash Drawer Cables 253
Cash Drawer Options 125
Cashier See Employee:programming
Changing Printer Commands 56
Charge key See Misc Tend 1-16
Charge tip is deducted from cash 111
Check 90
CHECK 6
check #
reset 131
starting 131
Check Cash 91
CHECK CASH 6
Check Endorse 91
CHECK ENDORSE 6
Check Endorsement Message 164
Check Unlock 65
CLEAR/ESC 6
Clerk See Employee:programming
closed checks 131
color to display on KV 76
Communications Ports 254
compulsory condiment 75
Compulsory drawer 125
compulsory non-add#
by PLU 76
compulsory validation
PLU 76
condiment choices
WLU 170
%
%1 - %10 9, 103
A
ADD CHECK 6
Add On Taxes 151
Alpha Characters
entering 18
Alpha Code Chart 20
Alpha code entry 116
Alpha Overlay 18
Authority Level
Alpha Descriptors 189
link to 181
Authority Levels
programming 186
auto clear error condition 117
auto grill 77
auto scale 76
auto tare# 76
AUTO-grill group # 77
B
batch
KP/KV 133, 134
Battery 250
replacing 262
baud rate 59
Bitmap File Download 64
Buffered receipt 14, 138, 139
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Index  269
condiment multiplication
WLU 170
consolidate like items 116
CONTINUE 6
Control Lock 12
Copy Program 229
CURR. CONV. 1-5 6
Currency Conversion 1-5 92
currency symbol 14, 138, 140
CURSOR CONTROL KEYS () 6
Custom Report 218
cutting after printing 59
D
data bits 59
date setting 27
DECIMAL 6
decimal position 53
Default Keyboard 4
Default keyboard level 129
Default Messages
Load 64
Default price level 129
Delete PLUs 73
Descriptors
report 163
system 160
destination
default 116
enforce 116, 118
Detail Printer Routing 199
direct multiplication 116, 119
discount
allow by PLU 76
Display Adjustments 2
DONE 6
Download
Bitmap file 64
program file 231
ROM file 64
drawer compulsion 125
drive through feature enabled 107, 109
Drive Thru 93
DRIVE THRU 7
Employee
Edit Job Codes 182
Edit Pay Rates 184
job code 181
Pay rate 181
programming 180
EMPLOYEE 7
EMPLOYEE (1-10) 7
Enforce destination 116, 118
ENTER 7
enter time for transaction void 117
entry limit
global 116
ERR.CORR 7
Error Correct 93
Error Message List 158
Error Messages 157
Ethernet Specifications 257
F
FD STMP SHIFT 7
FD STMP SUBTTL 7
FD STMP TEND 7
feed lines after printing 59
feed lines before printing 59
food stamp eligible 76
Food Stamp Tend 94
Function Key
programming 85
Function Key Relocation 48
G
gallonage 75
General Function Options 116
General Printing Options 138
Global entry limit 116
Group
programming 83
group link #1 70
Guest # 94
GUEST # 7
Guest Check Message 165
H
E
E.J. & Detail Printing Options 148
Eat In 93
EAT-IN 7
electronic journal
activate 148
Electronic Journal 148, 149
embedded price PLUs 237
270  Index
HASH options 116
HOLD 7
I
INACTIVE 7
Ingredient
edit 201
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Ingredient Inventory 200
Initial Clear 21
Inventory
Ingredient 200
IRC 256
# of retries 53
cable 253
Ethernet Specifications 257
from register # 53
test 31
to register # 53
J
Job Code 181
Job Codes
edit 182
K
Key Relocation
function key 48
PLU 44
WLU 46
Keyboard Key Relocation 43
keyboard level 129
default 129
KEYBOARD LEVEL 1-5 7
Keyboard Levels
time activated 205
keys, register 12
Kitchen Printer Routing 195
Kitchen Printing/Video Options 133
Kitchen Video Routing 194
KP Routing (function key) 95
KP ROUTING (function key) 7
KP Time Period 214
KV Routing 190
L
Level/Modifier Options 129
link plu 76
LIST CHECK 1-4 7
Load Default Messages 64
Logo Message 156
logo size 59
Loop Back Connections 255
M
Macro
super macro 63
time activated 209
MACRO # 8
SPS 1000 Program Manual
MACRO 1 - 40 8
Macro 1-40 96
MACRO PAUSE 8
MACRO SET (function key) 8
Manager control 116, 118
Mdse Return 97
MDSE RETURN 8
Memory All Clear 34
Memory Allocation 37
Memory Clearing, selective 36
Message
Check Endorsement 164
Guest Check 165
logo 156
validation 166, 167
Messages 155
error 157
Error Message List 158
Minimum Stock 228
MISC TEND # 8
Misc Tend 1-16 98
MISC TEND 1-16 8
MODIFIER 1-10 8
modifier keys 129
Modifier/Size 99
N
negative inventory 76
NEXT RECORD 8
non add
PLU 75
non-add# compulsory
by PLU 76
NON-PLU Code 237
O
Open drawer alarm 125, 126
order# 133
global 133
overtime 146
factor 146
P
P/Bal 101
P/BAL 8
PAGE DOWN 9
PAGE UP 9
Page Up and Page Down 14
Paid Out 1-5 102
PAID OUT 1-5 9
PAID RECALL 9
parity 59
Index  271
PARK ORDER 9
password 53
training mode 127, 128
Password
System 62
Pay rate 181
Pay Rates
edit 184
piece count 70
Pin Descriptions 254
PLU
allow discount 76
allow surcharge 76
auto grill 77
auto scale 76
auto tare# 76
compulsory condiment 75
compulsory non-add # 76
compulsory validation 76
condiment 75
copy by range 117
delete 73
Delete by Range 74
do not display 77
Eligible for Canadian Donut Law 77
embedded price 237
food stamp eligible 76
Function key 9
gallonage 75
group link #1 70
group link #2 75
group link #3 75
inactive 70
Key Assignment 239
link plu 76
memo 76
Minimum Stock 228
modifier keys 129
negative 75
negative inventory 76
non add 75
price/halo 70
print on guest checks 77
print on journal 77
print on kp 76
print on KV 76
print on receipt 77
print price on guest checks 77
print price on receipt/detail 77
print red on kitchen printers 76
print red on receipt 76
product mix 76
Programming 69
promo 76
recipe# 70
272  Index
scaleable 76
single item 75
Status Group 75
status link # 70
Stock 225
stock PLU 76
taxable 75
waste 76
PLU Key Relocation 44
Pop-up Selection Windows 17
post tendering 117
preamble/postamble
guest check 14, 138, 140
PREV. RECORD 9
price embedded PLU 237
Price Inq 104
PRICE INQ 9
price level 129
default 129
Price Levels
time activated 207
PRICE LVL 1-20 9
Print (function key) 105
PRINT (function key) 9
Print Check (function key) 105
PRINT CHECK (function key) 9
PRINT HOLD 9
print red on kitchen printers 76
print red on receipt 76
PRINT SCREEN 10
Printer Commands
changing 56
Printer Configurations 258
Printer Driver Selections 55
Printer Routing 192
Printer Tables 190
Priority printing 133, 134
product mix
PLU 76
Product Mix Group Time Periods 217
Product Mix Groups 215
Product Mix Items 216
Program File Download 231
Program Scan
P-Mode 236
S-Mode 61
promo
allow by PLU 76
Promo 106
PROMO 10
Q
QUIT (function key) 10
SPS 1000 Program Manual
R
real time
KP/KV 133, 134
RECALL CHECK # 1-4 10
Recall Check 1-4 107
Recd Acct 1-5 102
RECD ACCT 1-5 10
RECEIPT 10
RECEIPT ON/OFF 10
Receipt Printer Routing 198
recipe # 70
Recipe Table 202
reg#
holds backup check track data 53
holds check tracking data 53
holds KP Global order# 53
holds time in/out data 53
register # 53
REPEAT 10
Report Descriptors 163
Report Options 143
Report Printing Options 141
Reports
edit existing 221
string 223
Requisition Printers 259
reset check # 131
retrys 59
ROM File Download 64
rounding
tax 122
Rounding 116
Routing
Detail Printer 199
Kitchen Printer 195
Kitchen Video 194
receipt printer 198
RS232C cable 253
RTC Setting 27
S
SCALE 10
Scale (function key) 108
scaleable 76
Screen Saver 120
scroll indicators 14
seat #
set default to 1 117
SEAT # 10
seat#
enforce 107
Self Tests 25
Serial Port Device Selections 57
SPS 1000 Program Manual
Serial Port Parameters
defining 59
SERVE ORDER 10
Server See Employee:programming
Shared Printers 258
Shifts
time activated 213
single item 75
Size/Modifier 99
S-Mode
Program Scan 61
Specifications 250
SPLIT PAY 10
starting check # 131
Stock Inq 104
STOCK INQ 10
stock plu 76
stop bits 59
Store # 53
Store Check 1-4 109
STORE CHECK 1-4 11
String Reports 223
time activated 211
SUBTOTAL 11
Super Macro 63
surcharge
allow by PLU 76
System Descriptor List 161
System Descriptors 160
System Options
Cash Drawer Options 125
E.J. & Detail Printing Options 148
General Function Options 116
General Printing Options 138
Kitchen Printing/Video Options 133
Level/Modifier Options 129
P-Mode 115
Report Options 143
Report Printing Options 141
S Mode 53
Tax Options 122
Time Keeping Options 146
Tracking File Options 131
Training Mode Options 127
Validation/Subtotal Print Options 136
System Password 62
System Printer Routing 192
T
TABLE # (1-4) 11
Table entry required 107
Take Out 93
TAKE-OUT 11
tare weight programming 108
Index  273
Tax Exempt 110
TAX EXEMPT 11
Tax Options 122
Tax rounding 122
TAX SHIFT 1-6 11
Tax Table 152
Taxes
add on 151
programming 150
VAT 154
Test
Display 28
Drawer 27
IRC 31
Keyboard 28
Mode & Clerk Key 29
Printer 32
RAM 30
RAM Checksum 32
Serial & IRC Loopback 26
Version Check 33
Time Activated Functions
programming 204
Time In/Out 111
TIME IN/OUT 11
Time Keeping Options 146
Time Period
programming 179
time setting 27
TIP (1-3) 11
Tip 1-3 111
Tip Declare 112
TIP DECLARE 11
Tracking File Options 131
Training Mode Options 127
transfer check
automatic 131
transfer totals 131
TRANSFER CHECK (1-4) 11
TRAY SUBTL 11
Tray Subtotal 112
W
waste
allow by PLU 76
WASTE 11
Waste (function key) 113
Window Look Up (WLU) 168
WLU
Add an Item In a Specific Position 174
Adding Functions 177
Adding PLUs or Condiments 172
condiment choices 170
condiment multiplication 170
Deleting Items 174
editing items 171
Function key 11
Key Assignment 239
programming 168
viewing PLU # 173
with More Than 10 Items 175
WLU Key Relocation 46
X
X/Time 114
X/TIME 11
Y
Y/N (function key) 11
Z
Zero skip 141
V
VALID 11
validation message 136
Validation Message 166, 167
Validation/Subtotal Print Options 136
VAT 154
VAT subtracted fm indiv PLU ttls 122, 123
Version Check 33
Void Item 113
VOID ITEM 11
274  Index
SPS 1000 Program Manual
SPS 1000 Program Manual
 275
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement